MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)

Quadrant sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃 tan 𝜃 cot 𝜃 sec 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃

-Trigonometric Ratios, Identities and Equations
I (0, 90°) + + + + + +
Sexagesimal System/Degree Measure
1 right angle = 90° 1° = 60’, 1’ = 60’’
Relationships II (90°, 180°) + - - - - +
180° 22
(i) 𝜋 radian = 180°or 1 radian = ( 𝜋 ) = 57°16′22′′ where, 𝜋 = 7 = 3.14159
𝜋
(ii) 1° = (180) 𝑟𝑎𝑑 = 0.01746 𝑟𝑎𝑑 III (180°, - - + + - -
270°)
(iii) If 𝐷 is the number of degrees, 𝑅 is the number of radians and 𝐺 is the number of
𝐷 𝐺 2𝑅
grades in an angle 𝜃, then 90 = 100 = 𝜋 IV (270°, - + - - + -
𝑙 360°)
(iv) 𝜃 = 𝑟 , where 𝜃 = angle subtended by arc of length 𝑙 at the cnetre of the circle
and 𝑟 = radius of the circle. C Trigonometric Ratios of Some Standard Angles
Trigonometric Ratios Angle 00 450 300600 900 1200 1350 1500 1800
𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝐵𝐶 𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝐴𝐵 sin 0 1 1 √3 1 √3 1 1 0
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 = ℎ𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 𝐴𝐶 , cos 𝜃 = 𝐻𝑦𝑝𝑜𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑢𝑠𝑒 = 𝐴𝐶 , P H
𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝐵𝐶 1 √2 2 2 2 √2 2
tan 𝜃 = = 𝐴𝐵 , 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 cos 1 1 √3 1 0 1 1 √3 −1
𝐵𝑎𝑠𝑒
1 cos 𝜃 1 − − −
sec 𝜃 = cos 𝜃 , cot 𝜃 = = tan 𝜃 B A √2 2 2 2 √2 2
sin 𝜃
B Tan 0 1 1 √3 𝑢𝑑 −√3 −1 1 0
−
Domain and Range √3 √3
Trigonometric Ratios Domain Range Cot 𝑢𝑑 √3 1 1 0 1 −1 −√3 −𝑢𝑑
−
√3 √3
Sec 1 2 √2 2 𝑢𝑑 −2 −√2 2 −1
sin 𝜃 𝑅 [−1, 1] −
√3 √3
cos 𝜃 𝑅 [−1, 1]
Cosec 𝑢𝑑 2 √2 2 1 2 √2 2 𝑢𝑑
tan 𝜃 𝜋 𝑅 or (−∞, ∞)
𝑅 − {(2𝑛 + 1) : 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼} √3 √3
2
UD=undefined
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 𝑅 − {𝑛𝜋: 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 } 𝑅 − (−1, 1) Trigonometric Ratios of Some Special Angles
𝜋 Angle 1° 15° 18° 1° 36°
sec 𝜃 𝑅 − {(2𝑛 + 1) ∶𝑛 𝑅 − (−1, 1) 7 22
2 2 2
∈ 𝐼} sin 𝜃 √4 − √2 − √6 √3 − 1 √5 − 1 1 1
cot 𝜃 𝑅 − {𝑛𝜋: 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼} 𝑅 𝑜𝑟 (−∞, ∞) √2 − √2 √10 − 2√5
2√2 2√2 4 2 4
Range of Modulus Functions
| sin 𝜃 | ≤ 1, |cos 𝜃| ≤ 1, |𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃| ≥ 1 for all values of 𝜃, for which the functions are defined. cos 𝜃 √4 + √2 + √6 √3 + 1 1 1 √5 + 1
Trigonometric Identities √10 + 2√5 √2 + √2
An equation involving trigonometric functions which is true for all those angles for 2√2 2√2 4 2 4
which the functions are defined is called trigonometrically identity. Some identities are
1 1 1 1 (2 −
(i) sin 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 (ii) cos 𝜃 = sec 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 sec 𝜃 = cos 𝜃 tan 𝜃 (√6 − √3 √10 − 2√5 √2 − 1 √10 − 2√5
1 cos 𝜃 1 sin 𝜃 + √2 − 2) √3) [ ] [ ]
(ii) cot 𝜃 = tan 𝜃 = sin 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 tan 𝜃 = cot 𝜃 = cos 𝜃 5 √5 + 1
(iii) cos 2 𝜃 + sin2 𝜃 = 1 𝑜𝑟 1 − cos 2 𝜃 = sin2 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 1 − sin2 𝜃 = cos 2 𝜃
(iv) 1 + tan2 𝜃 = sec 2 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 tan2 𝜃 = sec 2 𝜃 − 1 𝑜𝑟 sec 2 𝜃 − tan2 𝜃 = 1 Trigonometric Ratios of Allied Angles
(v) 1 + cot 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 cot 2 𝜃 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃 − 1 𝑜𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝜃 − cot 2 𝜃 = 1
Transformation of one trigonometric Ratio to Another Trigonometric Ratios
Note: Above table is applicable only when 𝜃 ∈ (0°, 90°) 𝜃 sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 cos 𝜃 sec 𝜃 tan 𝜃 cot 𝜃
sin θ Cos θ tan θ cot θ sec θ cosec θ
−𝜃 − sin 𝜃 −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 cos 𝜃 sec 𝜃 − tan 𝜃 − cot 𝜃
sin θ sin θ √(1 − cos 2 θ) tan θ 1 √(sec 2 θ − 1) 1
√(1 + tan θ) √1 + cot θ
2 2
sec θ cosec θ 90° cos 𝜃 sec 𝜃 sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 cot 𝜃 tan 𝜃
cos θ cos θ 1 cot θ 1 −𝜃
√1 − sin2 θ √(cosec 2 θ − 1)
sec θ 90° cos 𝜃 sec 𝜃 − sin 𝜃 −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − cot 𝜃 − tan 𝜃
√1 + tan2 θ √(1 + cot 2 θ) cosec θ +𝜃
tan θ sin θ
√1 − cos 2 θ tan θ 1 1 180° sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − cos 𝜃 − sec 𝜃 − tan 𝜃 − cot 𝜃
√(1−sin2 θ)
cos θ cot θ √(sec 2 θ − 1) √(cosec 2 θ − 1) −𝜃
cot θ cos θ 1 cot θ 1 180° − sin 𝜃 −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − cos 𝜃 − sec 𝜃 tan 𝜃 cot 𝜃
√1 − sin2 θ √cosec 2 θ − 1 +𝜃
sin θ √1 − cos 2 θ tan θ √sec 2 θ − 1 270° − cos 𝜃 − sec 𝜃 − sin 𝜃 −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 cot 𝜃 tan 𝜃
sec θ 1 1 √1 + cot 2 θ sec θ cosec θ
−𝜃
√1 − sin2 θ cos θ √1 + tan2 θ cot θ √cosec 2 θ − 1 270° − cos 𝜃 − sec 𝜃 sin 𝜃 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − cot 𝜃 − tan 𝜃
1 1 √1 + tan2 θ √1 + cot 2 θ sec θ cosec θ +𝜃
cosec θ sin θ √1 − cos 2 θ tan θ √sec 2 θ − 1 360° − sin 𝜃 −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 cos 𝜃 sec 𝜃 −tan 𝜃 − cot 𝜃
−𝜃

Sign of Trigonometric Ratios

Important Points to be Remembered (vii) cot(𝐴 + 𝐵) =
cot 𝐴 cot 𝐵−1
(viii) cot(𝐴 − 𝐵) = (v) sin 𝐶 + sin 𝐷 = 2 sin (
𝐶+𝐷
) cos (
𝐶−𝐷
)
cot 𝐵+cot 𝐴
(i) sin𝜃, cos𝜃,cosec𝜃 and sec𝜃 has a period of cot 𝐴 cot 𝐵+1
2
𝐶+𝐷
2
𝐶−𝐷
2𝜋. cot 𝐵−cot 𝐴 (vi) sin 𝐶 − sin 𝐷 = 2 cos ( ) sin ( )
2 2
(ii) tan𝜃, cot𝜃 has a period of 𝜋. (ix)sin(𝐴 + 𝐵) sin(𝐴 − 𝐵) = sin2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐵 = cos 2 𝐵 − 𝐶+𝐷 𝐶−𝐷
(vii) cos 𝐶 + cos 𝐷 = 2 cos ( ) cos ( )
(iii)
2𝜋
Period of sin(k𝜃) is |𝑘|. cos 2 𝐴 2 2
𝐶+𝐷 𝐶−𝐷
𝜋 (x)cos(𝐴 + 𝐵) cos(𝐴 − 𝐵) = cos 2 𝐴 − sin2 𝐵 = cos 2 𝐵 − (viii)cos 𝐶 − cos 𝐷 = −2 sin ( ) sin ( )=
2 2
(iv) Period of tan(k𝜃) is |𝑘|
. sin2 𝐴 𝐶+𝐷 𝐷−𝐶
2 sin ( ) sin ( )
(v) Period of sinn𝜃, cosn𝜃, secn𝜃 and cosecn𝜃 is (xi) sin(𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 sin 𝐶 + cos 𝐴 sin 𝐵 cos 𝐶 + 2 2
2𝜋, if n is odd and, 𝜋 if n is even. sin 𝐴 cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶 − sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 sin 𝐶 Trigonometric Ratios of Multiple Angles
2 tan 𝐴
(vi) Period of tann𝜃, cotn𝜃 is 𝜋, if n is even or or sin(𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶 (tan 𝐴 + tan 𝐵 + (i) sin 2𝐴 = 2 sin 𝐴 cos 𝐴 =
1+tan2 𝐴
odd. tan 𝐶 − tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶) (ii) cos 2𝐴 = cos 𝐴 − sin 𝐴 = 2 cos 2 𝐴 − 1 = 1 −
2 2

(vii) Period of |sin𝜃|, |cos𝜃|, |tan𝜃|, |cot𝜃|, (xii)cos(𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶 − sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 cos 𝐶 − 1−tan2 𝐴
2 sin2 𝐴 =
|sec𝜃| and |cosec𝜃| is 𝜋. sin 𝐴 cos 𝐵 sin 𝐶 − cos 𝐴 sin 𝐵 sin 𝐶 1+tan2 𝐴
2 tan 𝐴
(viii) Period of |sin𝜃|+|cos𝜃|, |tan𝜃|+|cot𝜃| or cos(𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶 (1 − tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵 − (iii) tan 2𝐴 = (iv) sin 3𝐴 = 3 sin 𝐴 − 4 sin3 𝐴
1−tan2 𝐴
𝜋 tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶 − tan 𝐶 tan 𝐴) 3 tan 𝐴−tan3 𝐴
and |sec𝜃|+|cosec𝜃| is . (v) cos 3𝐴 = 4 cos 𝐴 − 3 cos 𝐴 3
(vi)tan 3𝐴 =
2 tan 𝐴+tan 𝐵+tan 𝐶−tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶
Maximum and Minimum Values of Trigonometric (xiii)tan(𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶 ) = 𝐴
1−3 tan2 𝐴
𝐴
1−tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵−tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶−tan 𝐶 tan 𝐴 𝐴 𝐴 2 tan 2 1−tan2 2
Expressions if 𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶 = 0, then tan 𝐴 + tan 𝐵 + tan 𝐶 = (vii) sin 𝐴 = 2 sin cos = 𝐴 (viii) cos 𝐴 = 𝐴
2 2 1+tan2 2 1+tan2 2
(i)Maximum value of 𝑎 cos 𝜃 ± 𝑏 sin 𝜃 = √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶 𝐴
2 tan 2 𝐴
(ii)Minimum value of 𝑎 cos 𝜃 ± 𝑏 sin 𝜃 = −√𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 (a) sin(𝐴1 + 𝐴2 + ⋯ 𝐴𝑛 ) = (cos 𝐴1 cos 𝐴2 cos 𝐴3 … cos 𝐴𝑛 ) × (ix) tan 𝐴 = 𝐴 (𝑥)1 − cos 𝐴 = 2 sin2
1−tan2 2
(iii)Maximum value of 𝑎 cos 𝜃 ± 𝑏 sin 𝜃 + 𝑐 = 𝑐 + (𝑆1 − 𝑆3 + 𝑆5 − 𝑆7 + ⋯ ) 2
𝐴 1−cos 𝐴 𝐴
(b) cos(𝐴1 + 𝐴2 + ⋯ 𝐴𝑛 ) = (cos 𝐴1 cos 𝐴2 cos 𝐴3 … cos 𝐴𝑛 ) × (xi)1 + cos 𝐴 = 2 cos 2 (xii) = tan2
√𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 2 1+cos 𝐴 2
(1 − 𝑆2 + 𝑆4 − 𝑆6 + ⋯ ) 𝐴 𝐴
(xiii)sin ( ) + cos ( ) = ±√1 + sin 𝐴 , sin ( ) − cos ( ) =
𝐴 𝐴
(iv)Minimum value of 𝑎 cos 𝜃 ± 𝑏 sin 𝜃 + 𝑐 = 𝑐 − 𝑆 −𝑆 +𝑆 −𝑆 +⋯ 2 2 2 2
(c) tan(𝐴1 + 𝐴2 + ⋯ 𝐴𝑛 ) = 1 3 5 7
√𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 1−𝑆2 +𝑆4 −𝑆6 +⋯ ±√1 − sin 𝐴
Trigonometric Ratios of Compound Angles where, 𝑆1 = tan 𝐴1 + tan 𝐴2 + ⋯ + tan 𝐴𝑛 Trigonometric Ratios of Some Useful Angles
The algebraic sum of two or more angles are [sum of the tangents of the separate angles] √3+1 √3−1
(i)sin 75° = = cos 15° (ii)cos 75° = =
generally called compound angles and the angles are 𝑆2 = tan 𝐴1 tan 𝐴2 + tan 𝐴2 tan 𝐴3 + ⋯ [sum of the 2√2 2√2
known as the constituent angle. Some standard tangents taken two at a time] sin 15°
formulas of compound angles have been given 𝑆3 = tan 𝐴1 tan 𝐴2 tan 𝐴3 + tan 𝐴2 tan 𝐴3 tan 𝐴4 + ⋯ (iii)tan 75° = 2 + √3 = cot 15° (iv)cot 75° = 2 − √3 =
below. [sum of the tangents taken three at a time] tan 15°
(i) sin(𝐴 + 𝐵) = sin 𝐴 cos 𝐵 + cos 𝐴 sin 𝐵 Note: if 𝐴1 = 𝐴2 = ⋯ 𝐴𝑛 = 𝐴, we have √3+√5−√5−√5 1 1+√5+√5
(v)sin 9° = = cos 81° (vi)cos 9° = ( )=
(ii)sin(𝐴 − 𝐵) = sin 𝐴 cos 𝐵 − cos 𝐴 sin 𝐵 𝑆1 = 𝑛 tan 𝐴1 , 𝑆2 = nC2 tan2 𝐴, 𝑆3 = nC3 tan3 𝐴, … so on. 4 2 8
(iii)cos(𝐴 + 𝐵) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 − sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 Transformation Formulae sin 81°
(iv)cos(𝐴 − 𝐵) = cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 + sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 (i) 2 sin 𝐴 cos 𝐵 = sin(𝐴 + 𝐵) + sin(𝐴 − 𝐵) Important Results
(v)tan(𝐴 + 𝐵) =
tan 𝐴+tan 𝐵
(vi) tan(𝐴 − 𝐵) = (ii) 2 cos 𝐴 sin 𝐵 = sin(𝐴 + 𝐵) − sin(𝐴 − 𝐵) 1. Product of Trigonometric Ratio
1−tan 𝐴𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐵 1
tan 𝐴−tan 𝐵 (iii) 2 cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 = cos(𝐴 + 𝐵) + cos(𝐴 − 𝐵) (i)sin 𝜃 sin(60° − 𝜃) sin(60° + 𝜃) = sin 3𝜃
4
1+tan 𝐴𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐵 (iv) 2 sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 = cos(𝐴 − 𝐵) − cos(𝐴 + 𝐵) 1
(ii)cos 𝜃 cos(60° − 𝜃) cos(60° + 𝜃) = cos 3𝜃
4

Page 1
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
(iii)tan 𝜃 tan(60° − 𝜃) tan(60° + 𝜃) = (iv) cosec −1 (−𝑥) = − cosec −1 𝑥 ;if 𝑥 ∈ (−∞, − 1] ∪ (ii) 3 cos −1 𝑥 =
1 [1, ∞) 1
tan 3𝜃(iv)cos 36° cos 72° = cos −1(4𝑥 3 − 3𝑥) ; 𝑖𝑓 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1
4 2
1 (v) sec −1(−𝑥) = 𝜋 − sec −1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ (−∞, − 1] ∪
(v)cos 𝐴 cos 2𝐴 cos 4𝐴 … cos 2 𝐴= 𝑛 𝑛−1
sin(2 𝐴) 𝑛
[1, ∞) 2𝜋 − cos −1(4𝑥 3
− 3𝑥); 𝑖𝑓 − ≤ 𝑥 ≤
1 1
2 sin 𝐴 2 2
2. Some Trigonometric Ratios (vi) cot −1(−𝑥) = 𝜋 − cot −1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 −1(4𝑥 3 1
2𝜋 + cos − 3𝑥); 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ −
sin 𝐴 + sin(𝐴 + 𝐵) + sin(𝐴 + 2𝐵) + ⋯ + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝐴 + Property IV { 2
𝐵 𝑛𝐵 3𝑥−𝑥 3 1 1
sin{𝐴+(𝑛−1) 2 } sin 2
(i)
1
sin−1 ( ) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ [−∞, −1] ∪ tan−1 ( ); 𝑖𝑓 − <𝑥<
(𝑛 − 1)𝐵) = 𝐵 𝑥
1−3𝑥 2 √3 √3
sin 2 3
[1, ∞] (iii) 3 tan−1 𝑥 = −1 3𝑥−𝑥 1
cos 𝐴 + cos(𝐴 + 𝐵) + cos(𝐴 + 2𝐵) + ⋯ . + cos(𝐴 + (𝑛 − 𝜋 + tan ( ); 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 >
1 1−3𝑥 2 √3
sin
𝑛𝐵 (ii) cos −1 ( ) = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ [−∞, −1] ∪ 3𝑥−𝑥 3 1
1)𝐵) = 2
cos {𝐴 +
(𝑛−1)𝐵
} 𝑥
{−𝜋 + tan−1 ( ) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < −
𝐵
sin 2 2 [1, ∞] 1−3𝑥 2 √3
cot −1 𝑥 ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 > 0 Property XII
3. Identities of Angles of a Triangle (iii)
1
tan−1 ( ) = { −1 2𝑥
If A, B and C are angles of a triangle (or A+B+C = 𝜋) 𝑥 −𝜋 + cot −1 𝑥 ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < 0 sin ( ); 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1
1+𝑥2
(i) (a) sin(𝐵 + 𝐶) = sin 𝐴 (b) cos(𝐵 + 𝐶) = − cos 𝐴 Property V 2𝑥
𝜋 (i) 2 tan−1 𝑥 = 𝜋 − sin−1 ( ); 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 > 1
(ii)
𝐵+𝐶
sin ( ) = cos
𝐴 𝐵+𝐶
(d) cos ( ) = sin
𝐴 (i) sin−1 𝑥 + cos −1 𝑥 = if 𝑥 ∈ [−1, 1] 1+𝑥 2
2 2 2 2 2 −1 2𝑥
{−𝜋 − sin ( ); 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < −1
𝜋
(iii) sin 2𝐴 + sin 2𝐵 + sin 2𝐶 = 4 sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 sin 𝐶 (ii) tan −1
𝑥 + cot −1
𝑥= if 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 1+𝑥 2
2
1−𝑥 2
(iv) cos 2𝐴 + cos 2𝐵 + cos 2𝐶 = −1 − (iii) sec −1 𝑥 + cosec −1 𝑥 = if 𝑥 ∈ [−∞, −1] ∪
𝜋
cos −1 ( ); 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑥 < ∞
1+𝑥 2
4 cos 𝐴 cos 𝐵 cos 𝐶 2
(ii) 2 tan−1 𝑥 = { 1−𝑥 2
𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 [1, ∞] − cos −1 ( ) ; 𝑖𝑓 − ∞ < 𝑥 ≤ 0
(v) sin 𝐴 + sin 𝐵 + sin 𝐶 = 4 cos cos cos Property VI 1+𝑥 2
2 2 2
(vi) cos 𝐴 + cos 𝐵 + cos 𝐶 = 1 + 4 sin sin sin
𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
(i)
2 2 2
(vii) tan 𝐴 + tan 𝐵 + tan 𝐶 = tan 𝐴 tan 𝐵 tan 𝐶 sin−1 {𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 + 𝑦√1 − 𝑥 2 } ;
Solution of Triangles, Heights and Distances
(viii) cot 𝐵 cot 𝐶 + cot 𝐶 cot 𝐴 + cot 𝐴 cot 𝐵 = 1 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 ≤ 1 𝑜𝑟
𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
(ix) cot + cot + cot = cot cot cot 𝑖𝑓 𝑥𝑦 < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 > 1 Basic Rules of Triangle
2 2 2 2 2 2
𝐴 𝐵 𝐵 𝐶 𝐶 𝐴 𝑎+𝑏+𝑐
(x) tan tan + tan tan + tan tan = 1 sin−1 𝑥 + sin−1 𝑦 = 𝜋 − sin−1 {𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 + 𝑦 √1 − 𝑥 2 } ; 𝑠=
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 sin 𝐶 1
Important results 𝑖𝑓 0 < 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 + 𝑦 > 1 2 2 (i) Sine Rule = = = , where R
𝑎 𝑏 𝑐 2𝑅
(i)sin 𝜃 = 0 → 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼(ii)cos 𝜃 = 0 → 𝜃 = is the radius of the circumcircle of the ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶
𝜋
(2𝑛 − 1) 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 (iii)tan 𝜃 = 0 → 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 −𝜋 – sin−1 {𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 + 𝑦√1 − 𝑥 2 } ; 𝑏 2 +𝑐 2 −𝑎2 𝑎 2 +𝑐 2 −𝑏 2
2 (ii) Cosine Rule cos 𝐴 = ,cos 𝐵 =
(iv)sin 𝜃 = sin 𝛼 → 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋 + (−1)𝑛 𝛼, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝛼 ∈ { 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 > 1 2𝑏𝑐 2𝑎𝑐
𝑎 2 +𝑏 2 −𝑐 2
𝜋 𝜋
[− , ] , 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 (ii) and cos 𝐶 =
2𝑎𝑏
2 2 sin−1 𝑥 (iii)Projection Rule 𝑎 = 𝑏 cos 𝐶 + 𝑐 cos 𝐵, 𝑏 =
(v)cos 𝜃 = cos 𝛼 → 𝜃 = 2𝑛𝜋 ± 𝛼, where 𝛼 ∈ [0, 𝜋], 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼
𝜋 𝜋 sin−1 {𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 − 𝑦√1 − 𝑥 2 } ; 𝑐 cos 𝐴 + 𝑎 cos 𝐶 and 𝑐 = 𝑎 cos 𝐵 + 𝑏 cos 𝐴
(vi)tan 𝜃 = tan 𝛼 → 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋 + 𝛼, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝛼 ∈ (− , ) , 𝑛 ∈ 𝐵−𝐶 𝑏−𝑐 𝐴 𝐶−𝐴
2 2 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 ≤ 1 𝑜𝑟 (iv)Napier’s Analogy tan = cot ,tan =
𝐼, 𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋 ± 𝑘 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 2 𝑏+𝑐 2 2
𝑐−𝑎 𝐵 𝐴−𝐵 𝑎−𝑏 𝐶
(vii)sin2 𝜃 = sin2 𝛼, cos 2 𝜃 = cos 2 𝛼, tan2 𝜃 = tan2 𝛼 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 𝑖𝑓 𝑥𝑦 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 > 1 cot 𝑎𝑛𝑑 tan = cot
𝑐+𝑎 2 2 𝑎+𝑏 2
𝜋
(viii)sin 𝜃 = 1 → 𝜃 = (4𝑛 + 1) 𝑛≠𝐼 − sin −1
𝑦= 𝜋 − sin −1
{𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 − 𝑦√1 − 𝑥 2 } ; Trigonometrical Ratios of Half of the Angles
2
(ix)cos 𝜃 = 1 → 𝜃 = 2𝑛𝜋 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 𝑖𝑓 0 < 𝑥 ≤ 1, −1 ≤ 𝑦 ≤ 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 > 1 𝐴
(I)sin = √
(𝑠−𝑏)(𝑠−𝑐)
, sin = √
𝐵 (𝑠−𝑐)(𝑠−𝑎)
, sin = √
𝐶 (𝑠−𝑎)(𝑠−𝑏)

(x)cos 𝜃 = −1 → 𝜃 = (2𝑛 + 1)𝜋 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 2 𝑏𝑐 2 𝑎𝑐 2 𝑎𝑏

−𝜋 – sin−1 {𝑥√1 − 𝑦 2 − 𝑦√1 − 𝑥 2 } ;
sin 𝜃 = sin 𝛼 , cos 𝜃 = cos 𝛼 (II)cos = √
𝐴 𝑠(𝑠−𝑎)
, cos = √
𝐵 𝑠(𝑠−𝑏)
, cos = √
𝐶 𝑠(𝑠−𝑐)
(xi) sin 𝜃 = sin 𝛼 and tan 𝜃 = tan 𝛼 } → 𝜃 = 2𝑛𝜋 ± 𝛼 𝑛 ≠ 𝐼 {𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 < 0,0 < 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 > 1 2 𝑏𝑐 2 𝑎𝑐 2 𝑎𝑏
tan 𝜃 = tan 𝛼 and cos 𝜃 = cos 𝛼 Property VII 𝐴 (𝑠−𝑏)(𝑠−𝑐) 𝐵 (𝑠−𝑎)(𝑠−𝑐) 𝐶
(xii)Equation of the form 𝑎 cos 𝜃 + 𝑏 sin 𝜃 = 𝑐 (III)tan = √ , tan = √ , tan =
(i) −1
cos 𝑥 + cos 𝑦 = −1 2 𝑠(𝑠−𝑎) 2 𝑠(𝑠−𝑏) 2
Put 𝑎 = 𝑟 cos 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑏 = 𝑟 sin 𝛼, where 𝑟 = √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 and cos −1{𝑥𝑦 − √1 − 𝑥 2 √1 − 𝑦 2 } ∶ 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 + 𝑦 ≥ √
0 (𝑠−𝑎)(𝑠−𝑏)
|𝑐| ≤ √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 { 𝑠(𝑠−𝑐)
2𝜋 − cos −1{𝑥𝑦 − √1 − 𝑥 2 √1 − 𝑦 2 } ; 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 + 𝑦 ≤ 0
then 𝜃 = 2𝑛𝜋 ± 𝛼 + ∅, 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 where, 𝛼 = cos −1 2 2 and
|𝑐| Area of Triangles
√𝑎 +𝑏 (ii) cos −1 𝑥 − cos −1 𝑦 = Consider a triangle of side a, b, c.
𝑏
∅ = tan−1 cos −1{𝑥𝑦 + √1 − 𝑥 2 √1 − 𝑦 2 } ∶ 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥, 𝑦 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 ≤ 𝑦 (i) 1 1
∆= 𝑏𝑐 sin 𝐴 = 𝑐𝑎 sin 𝐵 = 𝑎𝑏 sin 𝐶
1
𝑎 { 2 2 2
(a) if |𝑐| > √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 , equation has no solution. − cos −1{𝑥𝑦 + √1 − 𝑥 2 √1 − 𝑦 2 } ; 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑦 ≤ 0, 0 < 𝑥 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥 ≥ 𝑦 𝑐 2 sin 𝐴 sin 𝐵 𝑎 2 sin 𝐵 sin 𝐶 𝑏 2 sin 𝐶 sin 𝐴
(ii) ∆= = =
(b) if |𝑐| ≤ √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 , equation is solvable Property VIII 2 sin 𝐶 2 sin 𝐴 2 sin 𝐵
𝑛𝜋 𝑛
(i)
−1 −1 (iii) ∆= √𝑠(𝑠 − 𝑎)(𝑠 − 𝑏)(𝑠 − 𝑐), it’s known as
(i) sin ( + 𝜃) = (−1)2 cos 𝜃, if 𝑛 is odd.= tan 𝑥 + tan 𝑦 =
2
𝑥+𝑦 Heron’s formula.
𝑛
(−1) 2 sin 𝜃, if 𝑛 is even. tan−1 ( ) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥𝑦 < 1 𝑎+𝑏+𝑐
𝑛−1
1−𝑥𝑦 Where, 𝑠 = (semi − perimeter of triangle)
𝑛𝜋 𝑥+𝑦 2
(ii) cos ( + 𝜃) = (−1) 2 sin 𝜃, if 𝑛 is odd.= 𝜋 + tan−1 ( ) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 > 0, 𝑦 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥𝑦 > 1 (iv) ∆=
𝑎𝑏𝑐
= 𝑟𝑠, Where R and r are the radii of
2 1−𝑥𝑦
𝑛 4𝑅
(−1) cos 𝜃, if 𝑛 is even.
2 −1 𝑥+𝑦 the circumcircle and the incircle of the∆𝐴𝐵𝐶,
(iii) sin 𝜃1 + sin 𝜃2 + ⋯ + sin 𝜃𝑛 = 𝑛 → sin 𝜃1 = {−𝜋 + tan (1−𝑥𝑦) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < 0, 𝑦 < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥𝑦 > 1 respectively.
sin 𝜃2 = ⋯ = sin 𝜃𝑛 = 1 (ii) tan−1 𝑥 − tan−1 𝑦 = Solution of Triangle in General
𝑥−𝑦
(iv) cos 𝜃1 + cos 𝜃2 + ⋯ + cos 𝜃𝑛 = 𝑛 → cos 𝜃1 = tan−1 ( ) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥𝑦 > −1 (i) Solution when three sides 𝑎, 𝑏 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 are
1+𝑥𝑦
cos 𝜃2 = ⋯ = cos 𝜃𝑛 = 1 2∆ 2∆ 2∆
𝜋 + tan−1 (
𝑥−𝑦
) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 > 0, 𝑦 < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥𝑦 < −1 given, then sin 𝐴 = , sin 𝐵 = , sin 𝐶 = where, ∆=
(v) sin 𝜃 + 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐𝜃 = 2 → sin 𝜃 = 1 (vi)cos 𝜃 + 1+𝑥𝑦
𝑏𝑐 𝑎𝑐
𝑎+𝑏+𝑐
𝑎𝑏

sec 𝜃 = 2 → cos 𝜃 = 1 (vii)sin 𝜃 + 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = −2 → −1 𝑥−𝑦 √𝑠(𝑠 − 𝑎)(𝑠 − 𝑏)(𝑠 − 𝑐)and 𝑠 = and 𝐴 + 𝐵 + 𝐶 =
2
sin 𝜃 = −1 (𝑣𝑖𝑖𝑖) cos 𝜃 + sec 𝜃 = −2 → cos 𝜃 = −1 {−𝜋 + tan ( 1+𝑥𝑦
) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < 0, 𝑦 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥𝑦 < −1
180°
Important Points to be remembered Property IX (ii) Solution when two sides and the included
𝑥
 While solving an equation, we have to square (i) sin−1 𝑥 = cos −1 √1 − 𝑥 2 = tan−1 = angle are given, then
√1−𝑥 2
𝐴−𝐵 𝑎−𝑏 𝐶 𝐴+𝐵 𝐶 𝑎 sin 𝐶
it, sometimes the resulting roots does not −1 √1−𝑥
2
(a) tan ( ) = cot , = 90° − , 𝑐 =
cot 2 𝑎+𝑏 2 2 2 sin 𝐴
satisfy the original equation. 𝑥 𝐵−𝐶 𝑏−𝑐 𝐴 𝐵+𝐶 𝐴 𝑏 sin 𝐴
 Do not cancel common factors involving the = sec −1 (
1 1
) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 ( ) , 𝑥 ∈ (0, 1) (b) tan ( )= cot , = 90° − , 𝑎 =
2 2 𝑏+𝑐 2 2 2 sin 𝐵
√1−𝑥 𝑥
unknown angle on LHS and RHS. Because it √1−𝑥 2 (c) tan ( ) =
𝐶−𝐴
cot ,
𝑐−𝑎 𝐵 𝐶+𝐴
= 90° − , 𝑏 =
𝐵 𝑐 sin 𝐵

may be the solution of given equation. (ii) cos −1 𝑥 = sin−1 √1 − 𝑥 2 = tan−1 = 2 𝑐+𝑎 2 2 2 sin 𝐶
𝑥
𝑥 1 1 This is called as Napier’s analogy.
 (a) Equation involving sec 𝜃 or tan 𝜃 can never cot −1 = sec −1 ( ) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 ( ) , 𝑥 ∈ (0, 1) Circle Connected with Triangle
𝜋 √1−𝑥 2 𝑥 √1−𝑥 2
be a solution of the form(2𝑛 + 1) . 𝑥 1 1. Circumcircle
2 (iii) tan−1 𝑥 = sin−1 ( ) = cos −1
( )=
√1+𝑥 2 √1+𝑥 2
 (b) Equation involving 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 or cot 𝜃 can 1 𝑅=
𝑎
=
𝑏
=
𝑐
=
𝑎𝑏𝑐

never be a solution of the form𝜃 = 𝑛𝜋. cot −1 ( ) 2 sin 𝐴 2 sin 𝐵 2 sin 𝐶 4∆

𝑥 2. Incircle
√1+𝑥 2
= 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 ( ) = sec −1(√1 + 𝑥 2 ) , 𝑥 ∈ ∆ 𝐴
𝑟 = = − 𝑎) tan , = − 𝑏) tan = (𝑠 − 𝑐) tan
(𝑠 (𝑠
𝐵 𝐶
Inverse Trigonometric functions 𝑥 𝑠 2 2 2
(0, ∞) 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
𝐵
𝑎 sin 2 sin2
𝐶 𝐶
𝑏 sin2 sin 2
𝐴 𝐴 𝐵
𝑐 sin 2 sin 2
Property X 𝑟 = 4𝑅 sin sin sin , 𝑟 = = =
Properties of inverse Trigonometric Functions 𝐴 𝐵 𝐶
2 2 2 cos 2 cos 2 cos2
Property I (i) 2 sin−1 𝑥 = 3. Escribed Circle
1 1
−𝜋 𝜋 sin−1(2𝑥√1 − 𝑥 2 ); 𝑖𝑓 − ≤𝑥≤ 𝐵 𝐶
(i) sin−1(sin 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 ∈ [ , ] √2 √2
(I) 𝑟1 =
∆ 𝐴
= 𝑠 tan = 4𝑅 sin cos cos =
𝐴 𝐵 𝐶 𝑎 cos2 cos2
2 2 1 𝐴
−1 𝑠−𝑎 2 2 2 2 cos 2
(ii) cos (cos 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 ∈ [0, 𝜋]
−1 𝜋 − sin (2𝑥√1 − 𝑥 2 ); 𝑖𝑓 ≤𝑥≤1
√2 𝑏 cos2 cos2
𝐶 𝐴
𝜋 𝜋 ∆ 𝐵 𝐵 𝐶 𝐴
(iii) tan−1(tan 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 = (− , ) −1 2 1 (II)𝑟2 = = 𝑠 tan = 4𝑅 sin cos cos =
{−𝜋 − sin (2𝑥√1 − 𝑥 );
2 2 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ − 𝑠−𝑏 2 2 2 2 cos 2
𝐵
𝜋 𝜋 √2
(iv) cosec −1 (cosec 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 = [− , ] , 𝜃 ≠ 0 (ii) 2 cos −1 𝑥 = ∆ 𝐶 𝐶 𝐴 𝐵 𝑐 cos 2 cos2
𝐴 𝐵
2 2
𝜋 cos −1(2𝑥 2 − 1); 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 1 (III)𝑟3 = = 𝑠 tan = 4𝑅 sin cos cos = 𝐶
(v) −1
sec (sec 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 ∈ [0, 𝜋], 𝜃 ≠ {
𝑠−𝑐 2 2 2 2 cos2
2
(vi) cot −1(cot 𝜃) = 𝜃; if 𝜃 ∈ (0, 𝜋) 2𝜋 − cos −1(2𝑥 2 − 1); 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 ≤ 0 (𝐼𝑉)𝑟1 + 𝑟2 + 𝑟3 = 4𝑅 + 𝑟 (v)𝑟1 𝑟2 + 𝑟2 𝑟3 + 𝑟3 𝑟1 =
𝑟1 𝑟2 𝑟3
𝑟
Property II (iii) 2 tan−1 𝑥 =
2𝑥
(i) 𝑠𝑖𝑛(sin−1 𝑥) = 𝑥; if 𝑥 ∈ [−1, 1] tan−1 ( 2 ) ;
1−𝑥
𝑖𝑓 − 1 < 𝑥 < 1 Quadratic Equations and Inequalities
(ii) 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑐𝑜𝑠 −1 𝑥) = 𝑥; if 𝑥 ∈ [−1, 1] 2𝑥
𝜋 + tan−1 ( ); 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 > 1 Solution of Quadratic Equation
(iii) 𝑡𝑎𝑛(tan−1 𝑥) = 𝑥;if 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 1−𝑥2
(iv) 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐(cosec 𝑥) = 𝑥; if 𝑥 ∈ [−∞, − 1] ∪ [1, ∞]
−1 −1 2𝑥 1. Factorization method
{ −𝜋 + tan (1−𝑥2 ) ; 𝑖𝑓 𝑥 < −1
Let 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 𝑎(𝑥 − 𝛼)(𝑥 − 𝛽) = 0. Then, 𝑥 = 𝛼
(v) 𝑠𝑒𝑐(sec −1 𝑥) = 𝑥 if 𝑥 ∈ [−∞, − 1] ∪ [1, ∞]
Property XI and 𝑥 = 𝛽 will satisfy the given equation.
(vi) 𝑐𝑜𝑡(cot −1 𝑥) = 𝑥; if 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅
(i) 3 sin−1 𝑥 = 2. Direct Formula
Property III 1 1
(i) sin−1(−𝑥) = − sin−1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ [−1, 1] sin−1(3𝑥 − 4𝑥 3 ); 𝑖𝑓 − ≤ 𝑥 ≤ Quadratic equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0(𝑎 ≠ 0) has two
2 2
(ii) cos −1(−𝑥) = 𝜋 − cos −1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ [−1, 1] 𝜋 − sin −1(3𝑥
− 4𝑥 3 ); 1
𝑖𝑓 < 𝑥 ≤ 1 roots, given by
2
(iii) tan−1(−𝑥) = − tan−1 𝑥 ; if 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 1
−𝜋 − sin−1 (3𝑥 − 4𝑥 3 ); 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ 𝑥 < −
{ 2

Page 2
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
𝛼=
−𝑏+√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐
,𝛽 =
−𝑏−√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐
Or 𝛼=
−𝑏+√𝐷
,𝛽 = i.e., 𝑛𝑡ℎ term from the start + 𝑛𝑡ℎ term from the end Important Results and Useful Series
2𝑎 2𝑎 2𝑎 = first term + last term 1. ∑∞𝑛=0
1
= 𝑒 = ∑∞
𝑛=0
1
= ∑∞
𝑛=𝑘
1
=𝑒
−𝑏−√𝐷 𝑛! (𝑛−1)! (𝑛−𝑘)!
(c) common difference of an AP 𝑑 = 𝑇𝑛 − 𝑇𝑛−1 , ∀ 𝑛 > 1 1 1 1
2𝑎
1 2. ∑∞
𝑛=1 𝑛! = + + +⋯∞ = 𝑒 −1
Where, 𝐷 = ∆= 𝑏 − 4𝑎𝑐 is called discriminant of the
2
1
1!
1
2!
1
3!
1
1
equation. Above formulas also known as (d) 𝑇𝑛 = [𝑇𝑛−𝑘 + 𝑇𝑛+𝑘 ], 𝑘 < 𝑛 3. ∞
∑𝑛=2 = + + +⋯∞ = 𝑒 −2
2 𝑛! 2! 3! 4!
Sridharacharya formula. Selection of Term in an AP 4. ∑∞
1
=
1
+
1
+
1
+ ⋯∞ = 𝑒 − 1
𝑛=0
Nature of Roots (i) Any three terms of AP can be taken as
(𝑛+1)!
1
1! 2!
1
3!
1 1 1
Let quadratic equation be 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0, whose (𝑎 − 𝑑), 𝑎, (𝑎 + 𝑑) 5. ∑∞
𝑛=1 (𝑛+1)!
= ∑∞
𝑛=0 (𝑛+2)! = + + +⋯∞ =
2! 3! 4!
discriminant is D. (ii) Any four terms of AP can be taken as 𝑒−1
(i) For 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0; 𝑎, 𝑏, 𝑐 ∈ 𝑅 and 𝑎 ≠ 0, if (𝑎 − 3𝑑), (𝑎 − 𝑑), (𝑎 + 𝑑), (𝑎 + 3𝑑) 1 1 1 1 𝑒+𝑒 −1
6. ∑∞
𝑛=0 =1+ + + +⋯= =
(a) 𝐷 < 0 → Complex roots (iii) Any five terms of AP can be taken as (2𝑛)! 2! 4! 6! 2
1
(b) 𝐷 > 0 → Real and distinct roots (𝑎 − 2𝑑), (𝑎 − 𝑑), 𝑎, (𝑎 + 𝑑), (𝑎 + 2𝑑) ∑∞
𝑛=1 (2𝑛−2)!
(c) 𝐷 = 0 → Real and equal roots as 𝛼 = 𝛽 = Sum of n terms of an AP 1 1 1 1 𝑒−𝑒 −1
𝑏 𝑛 𝑛 7. ∑∞
𝑛=1 = + + +⋯ = =
−
2𝑎
𝑆𝑛 = [2𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑] = (𝑎 + 𝑙) where 𝑙 = last term 1
(2𝑛−1)! 1! 3! 5! 2
2 2
(ii) If 𝑎, 𝑏, 𝑐 ∈ 𝑄, 𝑎 ≠ 0, then Arithmetic Mean (AM) ∑∞
𝑛=0 (2𝑛+1)!
(a) If 𝐷 > 0 and D is a perfect square. (a) If 𝑎, 𝐴, 𝑏 are in 𝐴𝑃, then 𝐴 =
𝑎+𝑏
is called the 8. 𝑒 𝑎𝑥 = 1 +
(𝑎𝑥)
+
(𝑎𝑥)2
+
(𝑎𝑥)3
+⋯+
(𝑎𝑥)𝑛
+ ⋯∞
→ Roots are unequal and rational. 2 1! 2! 3! 𝑛!
arithmetic mean of 𝑎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑏. 9. ∑∞
𝑛
= 𝑒 = ∑∞
𝑛
(b)∑∞
𝑛2
(b) If 𝐷 > 0, 𝑎 = 1; 𝑏, 𝑐 ∈ 𝐼 and 𝐷 is a perfect 𝑛=0 𝑛=1 𝑛=0 = 2𝑒 =
(b) If 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , … . . , 𝑎𝑛 are 𝑛 numbers, then 𝑛! 𝑛! 𝑛!
square. ∑∞
𝑛2
their AM is given by, 𝑛=1
→ Roots are integral. 𝑎 +𝑎 +⋯+𝑎𝑛 𝑛!
(c) If 𝐷 > 0 and D is not a perfect square. 𝐴= 1 2 10. ∑∞
𝑛3
= 5𝑒 = ∑∞
𝑛3
(b)∑∞
𝑛4
= 15𝑒 =
𝑛 𝑛=0 𝑛=1 𝑛=0
𝑛! 𝑛! 𝑛!
→ Roots are irrational and unequal. (c) If 𝑎, 𝐴1 , 𝐴2 , 𝐴3 , … , 𝐴𝑛 , 𝑏 are in AP, then 𝑛4
𝐴1 , 𝐴2 , 𝐴3 , … , 𝐴𝑛 are 𝑛 arithmetic mean between 𝑎 and ∑∞
Relation between Roots and Coefficients 𝑛=1 𝑛!
1. Quadratic Equation 𝑏, where 𝑑 =
𝑏−𝑎
𝐴1 = 𝑎 + 𝑑 =
𝑛𝑎+𝑏
, 11. ∑𝑛𝑟=1(𝑎𝑟 ± 𝑏𝑟 ) = ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑎𝑟 ± ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑏𝑟
If roots of quadratic equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0(𝑎 ≠ 0)
𝑛+1 𝑛+1 (b)∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑘𝑎𝑟 = 𝑘 ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑎𝑟
(𝑛 − 1)𝑎 + 2𝑏 𝑎 + 𝑛𝑏
are 𝛼 and 𝛽, then 𝐴2 = 𝑎 + 2𝑑 = … … . . . 𝐴𝑛 = 𝑎 + 𝑛𝑑 = 12. ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑘 = 𝑘 + 𝑘 + ⋯ 𝑛 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑠 = 𝑛 . 𝑘, where 𝑘 is
−𝑏 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 𝑛+1 𝑛+1 a constant.
Sum of roots = 𝑆 = 𝛼 + 𝛽 = = − 2 Geometric Progression GP 𝑛(𝑛+1)
𝑎
𝑐
𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥
𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑛𝑡ℎ term of an GP from the beginning is 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎𝑟 𝑛−1 13. ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑟 = 1 + 2 + ⋯ + 𝑛 =
Product of roots = 𝑃 = 𝛼. 𝛽 = = 2
𝑛(𝑛+1)(2𝑛+1)
𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2 Selection of Terms in a GP 14. ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑟 2 = 12 + 22 + 32 + ⋯ + 𝑛2 =
√𝐷 6
Also, |𝛼 − 𝛽| = (a)Any three terms of a GP can be taken as 𝑛(𝑛+1) 2
|𝑎| 𝑎
, 𝑎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎𝑟. 15. ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑟 3 3 3
= 1 + 2 + 3 + ⋯+ 𝑛 = [ 3 3
]
2. Cubic equation 𝑟 2
If 𝛼, 𝛽 and 𝛾 are the roots of cubic equation 𝑎𝑥 3 + (b)Any four terms of a GP van be taken as 16. ∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑟 4 = 14 + 24 + 34 + ⋯ + 𝑛 4 =
𝑎 𝑎 𝑛(𝑛+1)(6𝑛3 +9𝑛2 +𝑛−1)
𝑏
𝑏𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑥 + 𝑑 = 0. Then, ∑ 𝛼 = 𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾 = − , 3
, , 𝑎𝑟 and 𝑎𝑟 3 . 30
𝑎 𝑟 𝑟
𝑎 𝑎
𝑐 𝑑 (c)Any five terms of a GP can be taken as 2 , , 𝑎, 𝑎𝑟 17. 2 ∑𝑛𝑖<𝑗=1 𝑎𝑖 𝑎𝑗 = (𝑎1 + 𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑛 )2 − (𝑎12 +
∑ 𝛼𝛽 = 𝛼𝛽 + 𝛽𝛾 + 𝛾𝛼 = , 𝛼𝛽𝛾 = − 𝑟 𝑟
𝑎 𝑎
and 𝑎𝑟 2 . 𝑎22 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑛2 )
3. Biquadratic Equation 18. Sum of first 𝑛 even natural numbers.
If 𝛼, 𝛽, 𝛾 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛿 are the roots of the biquadratic Sum of n Terms of a GP
(a)Sum of n terms of a GP is given by 𝑆𝑛 = i.e., 2 + 4 + 6 + ⋯ + 2𝑛 = 𝑛(𝑛 + 1)
equation 𝑎𝑥 4 + 𝑏𝑥 3 + 𝑐𝑥 2 + 𝑑𝑥 + 𝑒 = 0, then 𝑆1 = 𝛼 + 19. Sum of first 𝑛 odd natural numbers.i.e.,
𝑏 𝑎(1−𝑟 𝑛 )
𝛽+𝛾=− , , 𝑖𝑓 𝑟 < 1
𝑎 1−𝑟 1 + 3 + 5+. . +(2𝑛 − 1) = 𝑛2
𝑐 𝑐 𝑎(𝑟 𝑛 −1)
𝑆2 = 𝛼𝛽 + 𝛼𝛾 + 𝛼𝛿 + 𝛽𝛾 + 𝛽𝛿 + 𝛾𝛿 = (−1)2 = , 𝑖𝑓 𝑟 > 1 20. Sum of 𝑛 terms of series 12 − 22 + 32 −
𝑎 𝑎 𝑟−1
𝑐 42 + 52 − 62 + 72 − 82 + ⋯
Or 𝑆2 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)(𝛾 + 𝛿) + 𝛼𝛽 + 𝛾𝛿 = { 𝑛𝑎, 𝑖𝑓 𝑟 = 1 𝑛(𝑛+1)
𝑎 𝑎−𝑙𝑟 𝑙𝑟−𝑎 Case I when 𝑛 is odd =
𝑆3 = 𝛼𝛽𝛾 + 𝛽𝛾𝛿 + 𝛾𝛿𝛼 + 𝛼𝛽𝛿 = (−1)3 = −
𝑑 𝑑 (b)𝑆𝑛 = , 𝑟 < 1 or 𝑆𝑛 = , 𝑟 > 1,where, 𝑙 = last 2
1−𝑟 𝑟−1 −𝑛(𝑛+1)
𝑑
𝑎 𝑎
term of the GP Case II when 𝑛 is even =
Or 𝑆3 = 𝛼𝛽(𝛾 + 𝛿) + 𝛾𝛿(𝛼 + 𝛽) = − 𝑎
2
𝑒 𝑒
𝑎 (c)If |𝑟| < 1, then 𝑆∞ = ,if |𝑟| ≥ 1,then 𝑆∞ does not 21. If number of terms in AP/GP/HP are odd,
and 𝑆4 = 𝛼. 𝛽. 𝛾. 𝛿 = (−1)4 = 1−𝑟
then AM/GM/HM of first and last term is middle
𝑎 𝑎 exist.
symmetric Roots Geometric Mean GM term of progression.
if roots of quadratic equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0(𝑎 ≠ 0) (a) If 𝑎, 𝐺, 𝑏 are in GP, then G is called the 22. If 𝑝 𝑡ℎ , 𝑞 𝑡ℎ and 𝑟 𝑡ℎ term of geometric
are 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛽, then progression are also in geometric progression, then
geometric mean of 𝑎 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑏 and is given by 𝐺 = √𝑎𝑏.
√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 ±√𝐷 𝑝, 𝑞 and 𝑟 are also in geometric progression.
(i) (𝛼 − 𝛽) = √(𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 4𝛼𝛽 = ± = (b) If 𝑎, 𝐺1 , 𝐺2 , 𝐺3 , … , 𝐺𝑛 , 𝑏 are in GP, then
𝑎 𝑎 23. If 𝑎, 𝑏 and 𝑐 are in AP and also in GP, then
𝑏 2 −2𝑎𝑐 𝐺1 , 𝐺2 , 𝐺3 , … , 𝐺𝑛 , are the GM’s between 𝑎 and 𝑏, whose
(ii) 𝛼 + 𝛽 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 2𝛼𝛽 =
2 2
1 1 𝑎 = 𝑏 = 𝑐.
𝑎2 𝑏 𝑏
(iii) 𝛼 2 − 𝛽 2 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)√(𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 4𝛼𝛽 = 𝑟=( )
𝑛+1
, 𝐺1 = 𝑎𝑟 = 𝑎 ( )
𝑛+1
𝐺2 = 𝑎𝑟 2 = 24. If 𝑎, 𝑏and 𝑐 are in AP,then 𝑎𝑎 , 𝑥 𝑏 and 𝑥 𝑐 are
𝑎 𝑎
𝑏√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 ±𝑏√𝐷
2 𝑛 in geometric progression.
± = 𝑏 𝑛+1 𝑏 𝑛+1
𝑎2 𝑎2 𝑎( ) … … … … 𝐺𝑛 = 𝑎𝑟 𝑛 = 𝑎 ( )
𝑎 𝑎
(iv) 𝛼 3 + 𝛽 3 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)3 − 3𝛼𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽) = −
𝑏(𝑏 2 −3𝑎𝑐)
(c) Product of 𝑛 GM’s Complex Number
𝑎3
(v) 𝛼 3 − 𝛽 3 = (𝛼 − 𝛽)3 + 3𝛼𝛽(𝛼 − 𝛽) = 𝐺1 × 𝐺2 × 𝐺3 × … … … × 𝐺𝑛 = 𝐺 𝑛
𝑰𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒍 𝑷𝒐𝒘𝒆𝒓𝒔 𝒐𝒇 𝑰𝒐𝒕𝒂 (𝒊)
±(𝑏 2−𝑎𝑐)√𝑏 2 −4𝑎𝑐 Harmonic Progression (HP)
A sequence 𝑎1 , 𝑎2 , 𝑎3 , … … . . . , 𝑎𝑛 of non-zero numbers 𝑖 = √−1 , 𝑖 2 = −1, 𝑖 3 = −𝑖 , 𝑖 4 = 1
𝑎3
(vi) 𝛼 4 + 𝛽 4 = {(𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 2𝛼𝛽}2 − 2𝛼 2 𝛽 2 = is called a Harmonic Progression (HP), if the 𝑆𝑜 𝑖 4𝑛+1 = 𝑖 , 𝑖 4𝑛+2 = −1, 𝑖 4𝑛+3 = −𝑖
𝑏 2 −2𝑎𝑐
2
2𝑐 2 1 1 1 1 In other word
( ) − sequence , , , … … . , is an AP 𝑛
𝑎2 𝑎2 𝑎1 𝑎2 𝑎3 𝑎𝑛
𝑖 𝑛 = (−1) 2 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑛 𝑖𝑠 𝑎𝑛 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟
(vii) 𝛼 4 − 𝛽 4 = (𝛼 2 − 𝛽 2 )(𝛼 2 + 𝛽 2 ) = Properties of AM, GM and HM between Two 𝑛−1

±𝑏(𝑏 2 −2𝑎𝑐)√𝑏2 −4𝑎𝑐 Numbers 𝑖 𝑛 = (−1 ) 2 . 𝑖 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑛 𝑖𝑠 𝑎𝑛 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑟

𝑎4 If A, G and H are arithmetic, geometric and A number of the form z = x + iy, where x, y ∈R is called a
𝑏 2 −𝑎𝑐 complex number
(viii) 𝛼 2 + 𝛼𝛽 + 𝛽 2 = (𝛼 + 𝛽)2 − 𝛼𝛽 = harmonic means of two positive numbers 𝑎 and 𝑏,
𝑎2 The number x and y are called respectively real and
𝛼 𝛽 𝛼2 +𝛽2 (𝛼+𝛽)2 −2𝛼𝛽 𝑏 2 −2𝑎𝑐 then
(ix) + = = = 𝑎+𝑏 2𝑎𝑏 imaginary parts of complex number z.
𝛽 𝛼 𝛼𝛽 𝛼𝛽 𝑎𝑐 (i) 𝐴= , 𝐺 = √𝑎𝑏, 𝐻 =
𝑏𝑐 2 𝑎+𝑏 i.e. , 𝑥 = 𝑅𝑒(𝑧) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 𝐼𝑚(𝑧)
(x) 𝛼 2 𝛽 + 𝛽 2 𝛼 = 𝛼𝛽(𝛼 + 𝛽) = − (ii) 𝐴≥𝐺≥𝐻
𝑎2 1. Algebra of complex numbers
𝛼 2 𝛽 2 𝛼4 +𝛽4 [(𝛼2 +𝛽2 )2 −2𝛼2 𝛽2 ]2 (iii) If 𝐴, 𝐺, 𝐻 are in GP, then 𝐺 2 = 𝐴𝐻
(xi) ( ) +( ) = = = Addition of complex number
𝛽 𝛼 𝛼2 𝛽 2 𝛼2 𝛽 2 (iv) If 𝐴, 𝐺, 𝐻 are AM, GM and HM between z1 + z2 = (x1 + iy1 ) + (x2 + i y2 ) = (x1 + x2 ) + i(y1 +
𝑏 2 𝐷+2𝑎2 𝑐 2
three given numbers 𝑎, 𝑏 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐, then the equation on y2 )
𝑎2 𝑐 2
Formation of Polynomial Equation from Given having 𝑎, 𝑏 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 as its root is Properties of Addition
3𝐺 3 𝑎+𝑏+𝑐
Roots 𝑥 3 − 3𝐴𝑥 2 + 𝑥 − 𝐺 3 = 0, where 𝐴 = ,𝐺 = Commutative:- z1 + z2 = z2 + z1
𝐻 3
1. Quadratic Equation 𝑥 2 − (𝛼 + 𝛽)𝑥 + 𝛼𝛽 = 1
1 1 1
+ + Associative:-
0 (𝑎𝑏𝑐)1/3 and =( 𝑎 𝑏 𝑐
) (z1 + z2 ) + z3 = z1 + (z2 + z3 )
𝐻 3
2. Cubic equation 𝑥 3 − 𝑆1 𝑥 2 + 𝑆2 𝑥 − 𝑆3 = 1 𝑛 Additive Identity :-
Exponential Series 𝑒 = lim (1 + ) z1 + 0 = 0 + z1
0 𝑛→∞ 𝑛
i.e., 𝑥 3 − (𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾)𝑥 2 + (𝛼𝛽 + 𝛽𝛾 + 𝛾𝛼)𝑥 − 𝛼𝛽𝛾 = 0 1 1 1 1 1 𝑛 Here , 0 additive identity.
𝑒 =1+ + + + + ⋯ = lim (1 + )
3. Biquadratic Equation 1! 2! 3! 4! 𝑛→∞ 𝑛
2. Subtraction of complex number
(i) 𝑒 lies between 2 and 3.
𝑥 4 − 𝑆1 𝑥 3 + 𝑆2 𝑥 2 − 𝑆3 𝑥 + 𝑆4 = 0 z1 = (x1 + iy1 ) and z2 = (x2 + iy2 )
i.e., 𝑥 4 − (𝛼 + 𝛽 + 𝛾 + 𝛿)𝑥 3 + (𝛼𝛽 + 𝛽𝛾 + 𝛾𝛿 + 𝛼𝛾 + (ii) 𝑒 is an irrational number. z1 − z2 = (x1 + iy1 ) − (x2 + iy2 )
𝑥 𝑥2 𝑥3
𝛽𝛿 + 𝛼𝛿)𝑥 2 − (𝛼𝛽𝛾 + 𝛼𝛽𝛿 + 𝛽𝛾𝛿 + 𝛾𝛿𝛼)𝑥 + 𝛼𝛽𝛾𝛿 = 0 (iii) 𝑒𝑥 = 1 + + + + ⋯ ∞, 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 (x1 − x2 ) + i(y1 − y2 )
1! 2! 3!
the quadratic function 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 𝑥 𝑥2 𝑥3 3. Multiplicative of complex numbers
(iv) 𝑒 −𝑥
= 1 − + − + ⋯ ∞, 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅
2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 is always resolvable into linear factor, 1! 2! 3! z1 = (x1 + iy1 ) and z2 = (x2 + iy2 )
iff Exponential Theorem z1 z2 = (x1 + iy1 )(x2 + iy2 )
𝑥2 𝑥3
𝑎 ℎ 𝑔 𝑎 = 1 + 𝑥(log 𝑒 𝑎) + (log 𝑒 𝑎)2 + (log 3 𝑎)3 + ⋯ ∞, 𝑥 ∈
𝑥
= (x1 x2 − y1 y2 ) + i(x1 y2 + x2 y1 )
2! 3!
𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 2𝑓𝑔ℎ − 𝑎𝑓 2 − 𝑏𝑔2 − 𝑐ℎ2 = 0 or | ℎ 𝑏 𝑓 | = 0 𝑅 Properties of multiplication
𝑔 𝑓 𝑐 Logarithmic Series Commutative z1 z2 = z2 z1
𝑥2 𝑥3 𝑥4 Associative (z1 z2 )z3 = z1 (z2 z3)
(i) log 𝑒 (1 + 𝑥) = 𝑥 − + − … . . ∞, log 𝑒 (1 + 𝑥) =
Sequences and Series 2 3 4 Multiplication Identity z. 1 = z = 1. z
𝑥𝑛
∑∞
𝑛=1 = (−1)
𝑛−1 Here , 1 is multiplication identity of an element z.
𝑛
Arithmetic Progression (AP) 𝑥2 𝑥3 𝑥2 Multiplication inverse :- every non zero complex
(ii)log 𝑒 (1 − 𝑥) = −𝑥 − − − − ⋯ ∞ , − log 𝑒 (1 − 𝑥) =
i.e., 𝑎, 𝑎 + 𝑑, 𝑎 + 2𝑑 is an AP, where 𝑎 = first term 2 3 4 number z there exists a complex number 𝐳𝟏 such that
𝑥2 𝑥3 𝑥2
and 𝑑 = common difference. 𝑥+ + + + ⋯∞ z. z1 = 1 = z1 . z
2 3 4
(a) 𝑛𝑡ℎ term is given by 𝑙 = 𝑎𝑛 = 𝑎 + (𝑛 − 1)𝑑 1+𝑥 𝑥3 𝑥5 Distributive law
(iii)log 𝑒 ( ) = 2 (𝑥 + + + ⋯ ∞) (a) z1 (z2 + z3 ) = (z1 z2 + z1 z3 ) (b)(z2 + z3 )z1 =
(b) 𝑎𝑛 + 𝑎𝑛′ = 𝑎 + 𝑙 1−𝑥
1 1
3
1 1
5
(iv)log 𝑒 2 = 1 − + + + − ⋯ ∞ z2 z1 + z3 z1
2 3 4 5

Page 3
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
4. Division of complex numbers If the general value of the argument is vii. (x − a)n = n c0 x n −n c1 x n−1 a + n c2 x n−2 a2 −
z1 = (x1 + iy1 ) and z2 = (x2 + iy2 ) θ, then the polar form of z is … … … … + (−1)n n cn an . i.e., (x −
n
z1 (x +iy )
= 1 1
(x x +y y )+i(x y −x y )
= 1 2 1 22 22 1 1 2 where z2 ≠ Z= |Z|[cos(2nπ + θ) + isin (2nπ + θ)], a)n ∑nr=0(−1)r cr . x n−r. ar
z2 (x2 +iy2 ) x2 +y2 Where n is an integer viii. (1 + x) = c0 + c1 x+ c2 x + … … … … … … +n cn x n .
n n n n 2
0 11. 𝑬𝒖𝒍𝒆𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒏 form of a complex number i. e. , (1 + x)n = ∑nr=0 n cr . x r
Conjugate of complex numbers If z = x + iy is a complex number, then it can beWritten ix. The coefficient of x r in the expansion of (1 +
If z = x + iy is a complex numbers, than conjugate of z is as x)n is n cr .
denoted by z̅ z= reiθ , where |z| = r and θ = arg(z) x. (1 − x)n = n c0 −n c1 x+n c2 x 2 −
i.e., z̅ = x − iy … … … … . +(−1)r n cr x r + … … + (−1)n n cn x n
This is called Eulerian form and eiθ = (cosθ + isinθ) and
Properties of conjugate i. e., (1 − x)n = ∑nr=0(−1)r n cr . x r
e−iθ = (cosθ − isinθ)
I. z̿ = z (a) (x + a)n + (x − a)n = 2( n c0 x n a0 + n c2 x n−2 a2 +
II. z + z̅ ↔ z is purely real
12. De-Moivre’s theorem
A simplest formula for calculating power of complex ……..)
III. z − z̅ ↔ z is purely imaginary (b)(x + a)n − (x − a)n = 2( n c1 x n−1 a + n c3 x n−3 a3 +
z+z̅ number known as De-Moivre’s
IV. Re(z) = If n ∈ I (set of integers) , then (cosθ + isinθ)n = ⋯…)
2
V. Im(z) =
z−z̅
(cosnθ + isinnθ) And if n ∈ xi. If n is odd , then (x + a)n + (x − a)n and (x + a)n −
2i
(set of rational numbers), the (cosnθ + (x − a)n both have the same number of terms equal to
VI. ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
z1 + z2 = z̅1 +z̅2 n+1
VII. z1 − z2 = z̅1 − z̅2
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ isinnθ ) is one of the value of (cosθ + isinθ)n .if 2
.
p
VIII. z1 . z2 = z̅1 .z̅2
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ is a rational number, than xii. If n is even, then (x + a)n + (x − a)n has ( + 1)
n
q
p p 2
IX. z1 z̅2 ±z̅1 z2 = 2 Re (z̅1 z2 ) = 2 Re (z1 z̅2) I. (cosθ + isinθ)p/q = (cos θ + isin θ) n
terms. and (x + a)n − (x − a)n has terms .
X. (z̅1 )n = ̅̅̅̅̅̅
(𝑧 𝑛 ) 𝟏
q q 2
̅̅̅̅̅
Z z̅ II. = (cosθ − isinθ) xiii. In the binomial expansion of (x + a)n , the rth term
XI. ( 1 ) = ̅ 1 , Z2 ≠ 0 cos(θ)+isinθ
from the end is (n-r+2)th term from the beginning .
Z2 z2
III. More generally for a complex numbers z =
XII. if z = ∫(z1 ), then z̅=∫ z̅1 r(cosθ + isinθ) = reiθ
xiv. If n is a positive integer , then number of terms in
(n+1)(n+2)
a1 a2 a3 a̅1 a̅ 2 a̅3 IV. z n = r n (cosθ + isinθ)n = r n (cosnθ + isinnθ) = (x + y + z)n is .
2
XIII. IF z = |b1 b2 b3 | , then z̅ = |b̅1 b̅2 b̅3 | where r n einθ 19. Middle term in the Expansion of (𝐱 + 𝐚)𝐧.
c1 c2 c3 c̅1 c̅2 c̅3
V.
nπ nπ
(sin θ + i cos θ) = [cos ( − nθ) + i sin ( − nθ)] i. If n is even, then in the expansion of (x + a)n , the
ai , bi , ci ; (i = 1 , 2 , 3 )are complex number. if zz̅ = 2 2 n
VI. cos θ1 + i sin θ1 )(cos θ2 + i sin θ2 ) … . . (cos θn + middle term is ( + 1)th term.
{Re(z)}2 + {Im(z)}2 2
5. modulus of a complex number i sinθn ) ii. If n is odd, term in the expansion of (x + a)n , the
n+1 n+3
=cos(θ1 + θ2 + ⋯ . . θn ) + i sin(θ1 + θ2 … + θn ) middle terms are th term and th term.
z = x + iy , |z| = √(x 2 + y 2 ) 2 2
VII. (cosθ + i sin∅)n = cos nθ + i sin n∅
It’s represented a distance of z from origin 20. Greatest Coefficient
13. The 𝐧𝐭𝐡 𝐫𝐨𝐨𝐭𝐬 𝐨𝐟 𝐮𝐧𝐢𝐭𝐲
6. Properties of Modulus The nth roots of unity, it means any complex number z, i. If n is even , then in (x + a)n ,the greatest coefficient is
I. |z| ≥ 0 n n
c
which satisfies the equation z n = 1or z = (1)1/n , z =
II. If |z| = 0, than z = 0 i. e. , Re(z) = 0 = Im(z) 2kπ 2kπ
2

III. – |𝐳| ≤ Re(z) ≤ |z|and − |z| ≤ Im(z) ≤ |z| cos + i sin

n
, where k = 0,1,2. . (n − 1)
n ii. If n is odd , then in (x + a)n , the greatest coefficient
IV. |z| = |z| ̅̅̅ = |−z| = |− ̅| z 14. Properties of Roots of unity is n cn−1 or n cn+1 both being equal .
i2π 2 2
V. zz̅ = |z|2 I. nth roots of unity from a GP with common ratio e n 21. Greatest term
VI. |z1 z2| = |z1 ||z2 | II. Sum of nth roots of unity is a always 0. In the expansion of (x + a)n
In general III. Sum of 𝑝𝑡ℎ powers of nth roots of unity is zero. if p is n+1
i. If x is an integer = p(say), then greatest term is
|z1 z2z3 … . zn | = |z1 ||z2 ||z3 | … . |zn | a not multiple n. | |+1
a
z |z̅1 |
VII. | 1| = , provide z2 ≠ 0 IV. Sum of 𝑝𝑡ℎ powers of nth roots of unity is n, if p is a Tp ≡ Tp+1.
z2 |z̅2 |
VIII. |z1 ± z2 | ≤ |z1 | + |z2 | in general |z1 ± z2 ± z3 … … ± multiple of n. 𝑥 n+1
ii. If ( x ) is not an integer with m as integral part of
zn | ≤ |z1 | + |z2 | + |z3 | + ⋯ + |zn | V. Product of nth roots of unity is (−1)n−1. 𝑎 |a|+1

IX. |z1 ± z2 | ≥ |z1 | − |z2 | VI. The nth roots of unity lie on the unit circle |z| = 1and 𝑥 n+1
divide its circumference into n equal parts. (x ), then
X. |z 2 | = |z|2 𝑎 |a|+1
XI. ||z1 | − |z2 || ≤ |z1 + z2 | ≤ |z1 | + |z2 | greatest possible 15. The cube roots of unity Tm+1is the greatest term.
Cube roots of unity are 1 , ω, ω2 ,
value of |z1 + z2 |is |z1 | + |z2 |and least value of |z1 + i2π 22. Important Result on binomial coefficients.
1 √3 −1−i√3
z2 |is ||z1 | − |z2 || Where ω = − + i =e 3 and ω2 = , arg(ω) = i. n
nc
cr +n cr−1 = n+1 cr (b) n−1 r =
n nc
(c) n r =
n−r+1
2 2 2
cr−1 r cr−1 r
XII. |z1 + z2 |2 = (z1 + z2 )(z̅1 + z̅2 ) 2π
and arg(ω 2)
=
4π
3 3 ii. c0 + c1 + c2 + … … . +cn = 2n
= |z|2 + |z2 |2 + z1 z̅2 + z2 z̅1 = |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 +
16. Properties of cube Roots of unity iii. c0 − c1 + c2 − c3 + … … … + (−1)n cn = 0
2Re(z1 z̅2 )
0 , if r is not a multiple of 3 iv. c0 + c2 + c4 + … = c1 + c3 + c5 + ⋯ … . = 2n−1
= |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 + 2|z1 ||z2 |cos(θ1 − θ2 ) I. 1 + ωr + ω2r = { 2n!
3 , if r is a multiple of 3 v. c0 cr + c1 cr+1 + ⋯ + cn−r cn = ((n−r)!(n+r)!
XIII. |z1 − z2 |2 = (z1 − z2 )(z̅1 − z̅2 ) 3 3r
II. ω = 1 or ω = 1
= |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 − (z1 z̅2 + z2 z̅1 ) = |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 − 3r+1 3r+2 vi. c02 + c12 + c22 + … . . +cn2 =2n cn =
(2n)!
III. ω = ω, ω = ω2 (n!)2
2Re(z1 z̅2 )
IV. Cube roots of unity lie on the unit circle |z| = 1 and n nπ
= |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 − 2|z1 ||z2 |cos(θ1 − θ2 ) vii. c0 − c2 + c4 − c6 + … … = (√2) cos
divide its circumference into 3 equal parts n
4
XIV. z1 z̅2 + z̅1 z2 = 2|z1 ||z2 |cos(θ1 − θ2 ) viii. c1 − c3 + c5 − c7 + … … … = (√2) sin
nπ
V. It always form an equilateral triangle
XV. |z1 + z2 |2 + |z1 − z2 |2 = 2{|z1 |2 + |z2 |2 } 4
z VI. Cube roots of -1 are −1, −ω, −ω2 . 0, if n is odd
XVI. |z1 + z2 |2 = |z1 |2 + |z2 |2 ↔ 1 is purely imaginary. ix. c02 − c12 + c22 − c32 + … … … . = {(−1)n2 n n
z2 17. Important identities c if n is even
XVII. |az1 − bz2 |2 = (a2 + b2 )(|z1 |2 + |z2 |2 ) where a , b ∈ R. I. x 2 + x + 1 = (x − ω)(x − ω2 ) 2
c1 c2 cn 2n+1 −1
XVIII. z is 𝐔𝐧𝐢𝐭 𝐦𝐨𝐝𝐮𝐥𝐮𝐬, if |z| = 1 II. x − x + 1 = (x + ω)(x + ω2 )
2
x. c0 + + + …….+ =
y 2 3 n+1n+1
Argument of (z) = θ = tan−1 ( ) III. x 2 + xy + y 2 = (x − yω)(x − yω2 ) c1 c2 c3 c 1
x xi. c0 − + − + … … + (−1)n n =
IV. x 2 − xy + y 2 = (x + yω)(x + yω2 ) 2 3 4 n+1 n+1
7. Principal value of Argument c1 c2 c3 cn 3 n
V. x 2 + y 2 = (x + iy)(x − iy) xii. c0 + + + + …..+ =( )
The value of the argument which lies in the interval 2 22 23 2n 2
VI. x 3 + y 3 = (x + y)(x + yω)(x + yω2 ) 1 3r 7r 15
(– π, π] is called principal value of argument xiii. ∑nr=0(−1)r n cr { r + + + +
VII. x 3 − y 3 = (x − y)(x − yω)(x − yω2 ) 2 22r 23r 24r
I. if x > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 > 0, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 arg(z) = θ 2𝑚𝑛 −1
VIII. x 2 + y 2 + z 2 − xy − yz − zx = (x + yω + zω2 )(x + … … … upto m time } =
II. if x < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 > 0, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 arg(z) = (π − θ) 2𝑚𝑛 (2𝑛 −1)
yω2 + zω)
III. if x < 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 < 0, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 arg(z) = −(π − θ) 23. Divisibility Problem
IX. x 3 + y 3 + z 3 − 3xyz = (x + y + z)(x + ωy + ω2 z)(x +
IV. if x > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 < 0, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 arg(z) = −θ Form the expansion, (1 + x)n = 1 + n c1 x + n c2 x 2 +
ω2 y + ωz)
8. Properties of argument … … + n cn x n
I. arg(z) ̅ = − arg(z)) We can conclude that ,
Binomial theorem
II. arg(z1 z2) = arg(z1 ) + arg(z2 ) + 2kπ (k = 0 ,1 or − 1 i. (1 + x)n − 1 = n c1 x + n c2 x 2 + … . . + n cn x n is
In general 1. Binomial theorem for positive integer divisible by x i.e., it is a multiple of x . or
arg(z1 z2z3 … … zn ) =arg(z1 ) + arg(z2 ) + if n is any positive integer , then (1 + x)n − 1 = M(x)
… … . . + arg(zn ) + 2kπ (k = 0 , 1 or − 1) (x + a)n =nc0x n + n c1 x n−1 a+n c2 x n−2a2 + ii. (1 + x)n − 1 − nx = n c2 x 2 + n c3 x 3 + … . . +n cn x n =
z
III. arg ( 1 ) = arg(z1 ) − arg(z2 ) + 2kπ(k = 0 , 1 or − 1) … … . +n cr x n−r ar + … … + n cn x n−nan . i.e., M(x 2 )
z2 n(n−1) 2
(x + a)n = ∑nr=0 n cr x n−rar iii. (1 + x)n − 1 − nx − x =n c3 x 3 + n c4 x 4 +
IV. arg(z1 z̅2) = arg(z1 ) − arg(z2 ) 2
z This is Called binomial theorem. Here , c0 , c1 , . . n cnare
n n
… . + n cn x n = M(x 3 )
V. arg ( ̅ ) = 2 arg(z) + 2kπ (k = 0,1 or − 1) and called binomial coefficient and n cr =
z 24. Multinomial theorem
VI. arg(z n ) = n arg(z) + 2kπ (k = 0, 1 or − 1) n!
for 0 ≤ r ≤ n. For any n ∈ N,
z z r!(n−r)!
VII. if arg ( 2 ) = θ, then arg ( 1 ) = 2kπ − θ, k ∈ I) 18. Properties of binomial theorem for positive i. (x1 + x2)n = ∑r1+r2=n n! x1r1 x2r2
z1 z2
r1 !r2 !
VIII. if arg(z) = 0 ⇒ z is real integer.
π , if arg(z) > 0 i. Total no of terms in the expansion of (x + a)n is
ii. (x1 + x2 + x3 + … … . +xn )n =
IX. arg(z) − arg(−z) = { n! r r r
−π, if arg(z) < 0 (n+1). ∑r1 +r2 +r3 + …..+rk=n x11 x22 … . xkk
r1 !r2 !r3!….rk !
X. if|z1 + z2 | = |z1 | + |z2 |, then arg(z1 ) = arg(z2 ) ii. The sum of the indices of x and a in each term is n.
iii. The above expansion is also true when x and a are
iii. The general term in the above expansion is
9. Square root of a complex number n! r r r
complex numbers. x11 x22 … … xkk
|z|+x r1 !r2 !r3 !…..rk !
If z= x + iy, then b √z = √x + iy = ± [√ + iv. The coefficient of terms equidistance from the
2 iv. The greatest coefficient in the expansion of
beginning and the end are equal. these coefficient are (x1 + x2 + x3 + … . . +xm )n is
|z|+x |z|+x |z|−x
i√ ] , for y > 0 =± [√ − i√ ] , for y > 0 known as the binomial coefficients and n!
2 2 2 n , where q and r are the quotient and
cr = n cn−r , r= 0, 1, …,n (q!)m−r [(q+1)!]r
10. Polar form v. General term in the expansion of (x + remainder respectively , when n is divided by m .
If z = x + iy is a complex number, then a)n is given by n cr x n−rar .
Z can be written as
v. Number of non – negative integral solutions of x1 +
vi. 𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 of the binomial coefficient steadily x2 + x3 + x4 + … … … . . +xn = n is n+r−1 cr−1
Z= |Z|(cosθ + isinθ)where , θ = arg(Z) increase maximum and then steadily decrease.
This is called polar form. 25. Binomial theorem for any index
If n is any rational number , then

Page 4
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
n(n−1) 2 n(n−1)(n−2) second kind and r are alike of third kind and rest are II. The number of ways of dividing n identical things
(1 + x)n = 1 + nx + + x3 +
x
2!
3! n!
different is among r persons such that each one gets at least one
… … . . , |x| < 1 p!q!r!
is n−1cr−1 .
i. If in the above expansion , n is any positive integer, IV. The number of permutation of n things of which
III. The total number of combination of n different
then the series in RHS is finite otherwise infinite . p1 are alike of one kind p2 are alike of rth kind such objects taken r at a time in which
ii. General term in the expansion of (1 + x)n is Tr+1 = that P1 + P2 + P3 + ⋯ + Pr = n,
n!
(n(n−1)(n−2)…..[n−(r−1)]) r p1 !p2 !..pr ! a) m particular objects are excluded = n−m cr.
x V. The number of permutation of n different things b) m particular objects are included = n−m cr−m .
r!
iii. Expansion of (x + a)n for any rational index taken r at a time, 35. Important point to be remembered
a
Case I. x>a i.e. , < 1 a) When a particular things is to be include in each  Function
x
a n a n arrangement is r. n−1 Pr−1 1. If a seta A has m element and set B has n element ,
in this case , (x + a)n = {x (1 + )} = x n (1 + ) then
x x b) when a particular things is always excluded , then
a n(n−1) a 2 n(n−1)(n−2) a 3 number of arrangement = n−1Pr (a) Number of functions from A to B is nm .
= x n {1 + n. + () + ( ) + ……….}
x 2!
x
x 3! x VI. number of permutation of n different things taken all (b)Number of one – one function from A to B is n Pm , m ≤
Case II. When x<a i.e. , < 1 at a time when m specified things always come n.
a
n x n
In this case , (x + a)n = {a (1 + )} = an (1 + )
x together is m! (n − m + 1)!. (c) Number of onto function from A to B is
a a VII. Number of permutation of n different things taken all nm − n c1 (n − 1)m + n c2 (n − 2)m … . . ; m ≤ n.
x n(n−1) x 2 n(n−1)(n−2) x 3
= an {1 + n. + () + ( ) + ….} at a time when m specified things never come (d) Number of increasing (decreasing) function from
a 2! a 3! a
n(n+1) 2 n(n+1)(n+2) 3 together is n! − m! × (n − m + 1)!. A to B is n cm , m ≤ n.
iv. (1 − x)−n = 1 + nx + x + x + 30. Division into Group (e) Number of non – increasing (non-decreasing)
2! 3!
⋯..+
n(n+1)(n+2)(n+r−1) r
x I. The number of Ways in which (m + n) different functions from A to B is m+n−1cm .
r! (f) Number 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑖𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 (one-one-onto) function from A
things can be divided into two group which contain m
= 1 + n c1 x + n+1 c2 x 2 + n+2c3 x 3 + ⋯
n(n+1) 2 n(n+1)(n+2) 3 and n things respectively =
(m+n)!
,m ≠ n to B is n! , if m = n.
v. (1 + x)−n = 1 − nx + x − x + m!n! 2. Number of permutations of n different objects taken r
2! 3!
n(n+1)(n+2)….(n+r−1) r This can be extended to (m + n + p)different things
… … . . +(−1)r x + …… at a time in which m particular objects are always
r! divided into three groups of m , n, p, things (a) Excluded= n−m Pr (b)Included =n−m Pr−m × r!
n(n−1) 2 n(n−1)(n−2) 3 (m≠n≠p)!
vi. (1 − x)n = 1 − nx + x − x + respectively = . 36. Geometry
2! 3! m!n!p!
r n(n−1)(n−2)…….(n−r+1) r II. The number of ways of dividing 2n different element 3. Given, n distinct point in the plane , no three of which
… . . +(−1) x + ……
r!
−1 2 3 (2n)!
into two groups of n objects each is (n!)2 are collinear , then the number of line segment
vii. (1 + x) = 1 − x + x − x + ⋯ ∞
formed = n c2 .
viii. (1 − x)−1 = 1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + ⋯ ∞ When the distinction can be made between the groups , 4. Given, n distinct point in the plane, in which m are
ix. (1 + x)−2 = 1 − 2x + 3x 2 − 4x 3 + … ∞ i.e. ,if the order of group is important this can be collinear (m ≥ 3) ,then the number of line segment is
x. (1 − x)−2 = 1 + 2x + 3x 2 + 4x 3 + … . ∞ extended to 3n different elements into 3 groups is (n c2 − m c2 ) + 1.
xi. (1 + x)−3 = 1 − 3x + 6x 2 − … . ∞ (3n)!
. 5. Given, n distinct points in the plane, no three of which
xii. (1 − x)−3 = 1 + 3x + 6x 2 + ⋯ . ∞ (n!)3
III. The number of ways of dividing 2n different element are collinear, then the number of a triangle formed
xiii. (1 + x)n = 1 + nx, if x 2 , x 3 , ..are all very small as
into two groups of n object when no distinct can be = n c3
compared to x
made between the groups i.e., order of the groups is 6. Given, n distinct points in a plane, in which m are
26. Important results
collinear (m ≥ 3), then the number of triangle formed
(2n)!
b n not important is .
i. Coefficient of x m in the expansion of (ax p + q) is the 2 2!(n!)
n
c3 −m c3 .
x
coefficient of Tr+1 , where r =
np−m This can be extended to 3n different element into 3 7. The number of diagonal in a n-sided closed polygon
(3n)!
p+q
groups is . = n c2 − n
ii. The term independent of x in the expansion of 33!(n!)
8. Given , n points on the circumference of a circle , then
b n IV. the number of ways in which mn different things can
(ax p + q) (a) Number of straight lines = n c2
x be divided equally it into m groups , if order of the
Is Tr+1 , where r =
np
(mn)! (b)Number of triangles = n c3
p+q group is not important is m . (c) Number of quadrilaterals = n c4
(n!) m!
iii. If the coefficient of 𝑟𝑡ℎ ,(r+1)th and (r+2)th term of V. if the order of the group is important , then number of 9. Number of rectangles of any size in a square of n ×
(1 + x)n are in AP, then n2 − (4r + 1)n + 4r 2 = 2 n is ∑nr=1 r 3 and number of square of any size is
T n−r+1 a
ways of dividing mn different things equally into m
iv. In the expansion of (x + a)n r+1 = × (mn)!
distinct groups is (n!)m .
∑nr=1 r 2
Tr r x
v. The coefficient of x n−1 in the expansion of 10. In a rectangle of n × p(n < 𝑝),numbers of rectangles
n(n+1)
VI. the number of ways of dividing n different things into np
of any size is (n + 1)(p + 1) and number of square
(x − 1)(x − 2) … . . (x − n) = − 1
r groups is [r n − r c1 (r − 1)n + r c2 (r − 2)n − 4
2
𝑟! of any size is ∑nr=1(n + 1 − r)(p + 1 − r).
The coefficient of x n−1 in the expansion of r (r n
c3 − 3) + ⋯ ].
n(n+1) 11. Suppose n straight lines are drawn in plane such that
(x + 1)(x + 2) … … (x + n) = VII. The number of ways of dividing n different things no two lines are parallel and no three lines are
2
vi. If the coefficient of 𝑝𝑡ℎ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑞𝑡ℎ term in the expansion into r groups into account the order of the groups and concurrent, then number of parts which these divides
n
of (1 + x) are equal , then p + q = n + 2 also order of things in each group is the plane is equal to 1 + ∑ n.
n+r−1
vii. If the coefficient of x r and x r+1in the expansion of Pn = r(r + 1)(r + 2) … . (r + n − 1). 37. Prime factors
x n VIII. The number of ways of dividing n identical things Any natural number >1 can, be expressed as product of
(a + ) are equal then n = (r + 1)(ab + 1) − 1
b among r persons such that each gets 1, 2 , 3 ,…… or k primes.
viii. The number of terms in the expansion of things is the coefficient of x n−r in the expansion of α α α α
Let n = p1 1 p2 2 p3 3 … … . pr r , where
(x1 + x2 + x3 … … … … . . +xr )n is n+r−1cr−1 . r
(1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + ⋯ + x k−1 ) . pi , i = 1, 2, 3, … . , r are prime numbers .
ix. If n is a positive integer and a1 , a2 , a3 , … . . , am ∈
31. Circular permutation αi , i = 1, 2, 3, … . , r, are positive integers .
C, then the coefficient of x r in
In a circular permutation , firstly we fix the position of I. Number of distinct positive integral divisors of n
The expansion of (a1 + a2 x + a3 x 2 + ⋯ … + am x m−1 )n
one the objects and then arrange the other objects in (including 1 and n) is (α1 + 1)(α2 + 1 )(α3 +
is
n! n n n all possible ways . 1 ) … … . (αr + 1 ).
∑ a1 1 xa22 … . amm I. Number of circular permutation of n different things II. Sum of distinct positive integral divisor of n is
n1 !n2 !…..nm !
α +1 α +1 α +1 α +1
x. For |x| < 1, taken all at a time is (n − 1)!. If clockwise and anti- p1 1 −1 p2 2 −1 p3 3 −1 pr r −1
1 . . ……..
(a) 1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + ⋯ . +∞ = clockwise order are taken as different. p1 −1 p2 −1 p3 −1 pr −1
1−x
1 II. Number of circular permutation of n different things III. Total number of divisor of n (excluding 1 and n ), is
(b)(b)1 + 2x + 3x 3 + … . . +∞ = (1−x)2 taken all at a time , when clockwise or anti-clockwise (α1 + 1 )(α2 + 1 )(α3 + 1 ) … … (αr + 1 ) − 2.
xi. Total number of terms in the expansion of 1
order is not different = (n − 1)!. IV. Total number of divisor of n (excluding 1 or n ), is
(n+1)(n+2)(n+3) 2 (α1 + 1 )(α2 + 1 )(α3 + 1 ) … (αr + 1 ) − 1 .
(a + b + c + d)n is III. Number of circular permutation of n different things r
6 V. The number of ways in which n can be resolved as a
at a time , when clockwise or anti-clockwise order are product of two factors is
nP
not different is r . 1
(a) (α1 + 1 )(α2 + 1 )(α3 + 1 ) … . (αr + 1 ),if n is not a
2r
Permutations and combinations 2
IV. If we mark number 1 to n on chair in a round table, perfect square .
Factorial:- for any natural number n we define factorial then n persons sitting around table is n!. 1
(b) [(α1 + 1)(α2 + 1 )(α3 + 1) … . . (αr + 1) + 1], if n is a
as n! = n(n − 1)(n − 2)(n − 3) … … … 3 × 2 × 32. Combination 2
Each of the different groups or selections which can be perfect square..
1 and 0! = 1! = 1 VI. The number of ways in which n can resolve into two
27. Permutation made by some or all of a number of given things
without reference to the order of the things in each factors which are prime to each other is 2r−1, where r
Each of the different arrangement which can be made by is the number of different factors in n.
taking some or all of a number of things is called a group is called a combination. n
Mathematically: - the number of combination of n VII. If p is prime and pr divides n!, then Ep (n!) = [ ] +
permutation . p
Mathematically:- the number of ways of arranging n different things taken r at a time is n n n
[ 2] + [ 3] + [ 4] + … …
distinct objects in a row taking r (0 ≤ r ≤ n) at a time C(n,r) or n cr or (nr) p p p
n! Integral solutions
is denoted by P(n , r) or n pr n
cr = ,0 ≤ r ≤ n
𝐧! r!(n−r)! I. The number of integral solutions of
i.e. , 𝐧𝐏𝐫 = (𝐧−𝐫)! 33. Properties of combination x1 + x2 + x3 + … … + xn where x1, , x2 , x3 , x4 … . xr ≥ 0is
n
28. Properties of permutation I. C0 = n cn = 1 (b) n c1 = n n+r−1
cn
n
(i) Pn = n(n − 1)(n − 2) … 1 = n! II. if n cr = n cp , then either r = p or r + p = n II. Number of integral solutions of x1 + x2 + x3 +
nP
n!
(ii) P0 = = 1 (iii) n P1 = n(iv) n Pn−1 = n!
n III. n
cr = r (b) n cr +n cr−1 = n+1 cr … . xr = n, where x1 , x2 , x3 … . xr ≥ 1, is n−1 cr−1 .
n! r!
(v) n Pr = n. n−1Pr−1 = n(n − 1). n−2 Pr−2 = IV. n
c0 +n c1 + n c2 + … … . +n cn = 2n 38. Sum of digits
n(n − 1)(n − 2). n−3 Pr−3 V. n
c0 +n c2 + n c4 + … … = n c1 + n c3 + ⋯ = 2n−1 1. Sum of the numbers formed by taking all the given n
nP
n n n (n−1) n−2 digits =
(vi) n−1Pr + r. n−1Pr−1 = n Pr (vii) n r = n − r + 1 VI. cr = n−1 cr−1 = cr−2 (sum of all the n digits) × (n − 1)! × (111 … ), n times.
Pr−1 r r (r−1)
2n+1
29. Important Result on permutation VII. c0 +2n+1c1 + 2n+1 c2 + … . . + 2n+1cn = 22n 2. The sum of all digits in the unit place of all numbers
n
I. The number of permutation of n different things VIII. cn + n+1 cn + n+2 cn + … … + 2n−1 cn = 2n cn+1 formed with the help of α1 , α2 , … . , αn .all at a time
taken r at a time , allowing repetitions is nr . 34. Important result on combination (repeatation of digits not allowed) is (n − 1)! (α1 +
II. The number of permutation of n different things I. The number of combination of n different things α2 + ⋯ + αn ).
taken all at a time is n Pn = n! taken r at a time allowing repetitions is n+r−1 cr . 3. The sum of all digits of numbers that can be formed
III. The number of permutation of n things taken all at a by using the digits
time , in which p are alike of one kind , q are alike of α1 , α2 , α3 , … . , αn (repetation of digits is not allowed

Page 5
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
10n −1 (i) 𝐼𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 of ∆ABC with vertices xxi. Condition of concurrency for three given line a1 x +
(n − 1)! (α1 + α2 + … . . +αn ) ( )
9
A(x1 , y1 ), B(x2 , y2 ) and C(x3 , y3 ) and whose sides are b1 y + c1 = 0, a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0 and a3 x + b3 y + c3 =
39. Arrangements ax +bx +cx ay +by +cy 0 is
a,b and c is 1 2 3 , 1 2 3
1. The number of ways in which m (one type of different a+b+c a+b+c a1 b1 c1
things ) and n (another type of different things )can (j) 𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟e of ∆ABC with vertices
xxii. |a2 b2 c2 | = 0 or a3 (b1 c2 − b2 c1 ) +
be arranged in a row so that all the second type of A(x1 , y1 ), B(x2 , y2 ), C(x3 , y3 ) and whose sides are a ,
a 3 b 3 c3
things come together is n! (m + 1)!. b and c is given by
−ax1 +bx2 +cx3 −ay1 +by2 +cy3 ax −bx +cx ay −by +cy b3 (c1 a2 − a1 c2 ) + c3 (a1 b2 − a2 b1 )
2. The number of ways in which m (one type of different I1 = , , I2 = 1 2 3 , 1 2 3 Point of intersection of two lines:-
−a+b+c −a+b+c a−b+c a−b+c
things ) and n (another type of different things ) can ax +bx −cx ay +by −cy
xxiii. Let the equation of lines be a1 x + b1 y + c1 =
I3 = 1 2 3 , 1 2 3
be arranged in row so that no two things of the same a+b−c a+b−c
0, and a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0, then their point of
type come together is 2 × m! n! Area of triangle/ quadrilateral b c −b c 𝐜 a −a c
(k) Area of triangle with vertices intersection is [ 1 2 2 1 , 𝟏 2 1 2 ]
3. The number of ways in which m (one type of different a1 b2 −b1 a2 a1 b2 −a2 b1
things ) and n (another type of different things ) m ≥ A(x1 , y1 ), B(x2 , y2 )and (x3 , y3 ), is Line Parallel and perpendicular to a given line
x1 y1 1 xxiv. The equation of a line parallel to a given line ax +
n, can be arranged in a circle so that no two things of 1 1 x1 − x2 y1 − y2
second type come together (m − 1)! m Pnand when ∆= ‖x2 y2 1‖ = ‖x − x y − y ‖ these points by + c = 0 is ax + by + λ = 0,where λ is a constant.
2 2 2 3 2 3
x3 y3 1 xxv. The equation of a line perpendicular to a given line
things of second type come together = m! n!
A,B and C will be collinear , if ∆= 0 ax + by + c = 0 is bx − ay + λ = 0,where
4. The number of ways in which m things of one type
(l) Area of the quadrilateral formed by joining the λ is a constant .
and n things of another type (all different ) (m ≥ n),
vertices Image of a point with Respect to a line
can be arranged in the form of a garland so that all the 1 x1 − x2 y1 − y2
second type of things come together, is
m!n!
and if no (x1 , y1 ), (x2 , y2 ), (x3 , y3 )and (x4 , y4 )is ‖x − x y − y ‖xxvi. Let the image of a point (x1 , y1 ) with respect to ax +
2 2 3 2 3 𝑥2 −𝑥1 𝑦 −𝑦
2
(m−1)! m Pn (m) Area of trapezium formed by joining the vertices by + c = 0 be (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ), then = 2 1=
𝑎 𝑏
two things of second type come together, is 1 −2(𝑎𝑥1 +𝑏𝑦1 +𝑐)
2 (x1 , y1 ), (x2 , y2 ), (x3 , y3 )and (x4 , y4 )is [(y2 +
40. De- arrangements 2 𝑎 2 +𝑏2

If n distinct objects are arranged in a row , then the y1 )(x1 − x2 ) + (y1 + y3 )(x3 − x1 ) + (y2 + y3 )(x3 − xxvii. The length of perpendicular form a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to a
x2 )] 𝑎𝑥 +𝑏𝑦 +𝑐
number of ways is which they can be rearranged so line 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 𝑖𝑠 | 1 2 12 |
√𝑎 +𝑏
that no one of them occupies the place assigned to it Shifting / Rotation of origin /Axes
Equation of bisector of the angle between the lines 𝑎1 𝑥 +
1 1 1 (x ′ − h) = xcos θ + ysin θ , (y ′ − k) = −x sin θ +
is n! [1 − + − + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑐2 = 0 are given by
1! 2! 3! y cos θ (𝑎1 𝑥+𝑏1 𝑦+𝑐1 ) (𝑎 𝑥+𝑏 𝑦+𝑐 )
(−1)n 1
42. Straight Line =± 2 2 2.
……. ]. √𝑎12 +𝑏12 √𝒂𝟐𝟐 +𝒃𝟐𝟐
n!
Slope (Gradient) of a line
41. Selection If 𝑎1 𝑎2 + 𝑏1 𝑏2 > 0, then we take positive sign for obtuse and
a. The total number of ways in which it is possible to m = tan θ
i. Slope of a line parallel to X-axis , m=0. negative sign for acute.
make a selection by taking some or all the given n If 𝑎1 𝑎2 + 𝑏1 𝑏2 < 0, then we take negative sign for obtuse
different objects is n c1 +n c2 + … . + n cn = 2n − 1 ii. Slope of a line parallel to Y-axis , m =∞.
iii. Slope of a line equally inclined with axes is 1 or -1 as and positive sign for acute.
b. If there are m items of one kind , n items of another 43. Pair of lines
kind and so on . then , the number of ways of choosing it makes an angle of
450 or 1350 , with positive direction of x − axis General equation of a pair of straight lines is 𝑎x 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 +
r item out of these items = coefficient of x r in 2
𝑏𝑦 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0
(1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + … . +x m )(1 + x + x 2 + x 3 + iv. Slope of a line passing through (x1 , y1 )and (x2 , y2 )is
y −y
given by m = tan θ = 2 1. Homogeneous equation of second degree
… . . +x n ) … x2 −x1 The general form of homogeneous equation of second
c. If there are m item of one kind, n items of another Angle between two lines degree x and y is 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 = 0, which passes
kind and so on. then , the number of ways of choosing v. The angle θ between two lines having slops through the origin.
r items out of these items such that at least one kind m −m
m1 and m2 , is tan θ = | 2 1 |. Important properties
is included in every selection =coefficient of x r in 1+m1 m2
−ℎ+√ℎ2 −𝑎𝑏
(x + x 2 + … . +x m )(x + x 2 + x 3 + ⋯ . . +x n ) … vi. Two lines are parallel , if f m1 = m2 . i. Slope of first line , 𝑚1 =
𝑏
and slope of
d. The number of ways of selecting r items from a group vii. Two lines are perpendicular to each other, iff m1 m2 = −ℎ−√ℎ2 −𝑎𝑏
−1. second line 𝑚2 = ∴ 𝑚1 + 𝑚2 =
of n items in which p are identical , is n−pcr + 2ℎ
𝑏
𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥𝑦 𝑎
n−p
cr−1 + n−p cr−2 + … … +n−pc0 , if r ≤ p and Equation of straight Line − =− and 𝑚1 𝑚2 = =
𝑏 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑦 2 𝑏
n−p
cr +n−p cr−1 + n−pcr−2 + … + n−p cr−p, if r > 𝑝 viii. The equation of a line parallel to X-axis at a distance b 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 2
from it , is given by y = b here ,
e. The number of ways in which n identical things can 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑦 2
ix. The equation of a line parallel to Y-axis at a distance a 𝑚1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑚2 𝑎𝑟𝑒
be distributed into r different groups is
n+r−1 from it, is given by x=a Real and distinct, if ℎ2 > 𝑎𝑏., Coincident, if ℎ2 = 𝑎𝑏.
cr−1 or n−1cr−1. according as blanks groups are
x. Equation of X-axis is y=0 ,Imaginary, if ℎ2 < 𝑎𝑏.
or are not admissible.
xi. Equation of Y-axis is x=0
f. The number of ways of answering one or more of n
Different form of the equation of a straight Line
ii. Angle between the pair of lines is given by
questions is 2n − 1. 2√ℎ 2−𝑎𝑏
xii. Slope Intercept form the equation of a line with slope 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 =
g. The number of ways of answering one or more n 𝑎+𝑏
m and making an intercept c on Y-axis , is If lines are coincident, then ℎ2 = 𝑎𝑏.
questions when each question has an alternative =2n
y = mx + c If lines are perpendicular, then 𝑎 + 𝑏 = 0
h. n! + 1 is not divisible by any natural number between
If the line passes through the origin, then its equation
2 and n.
will be y = mx
iii. The combined equation of bisector of the angles
i. If there are l objects of one kind , m objects of second between the lines represented by the equation
xiii. One points form :- the equation of a line which passes 𝑥 2 −𝑦 2
kind n objects of third kind and so on. Then the 𝑎𝑥 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 = 0 is
2
=
𝑥𝑦
⇒ ℎ𝑥 2 −
through the point (x1 , y1 )and has slope of m is given 𝑎−𝑏 ℎ
natural number of possible arrangements of r objects
by (y − y1 ) = m(x − x1 ) (𝑎 − 𝑏)𝑥𝑦 − ℎ𝑦 2 = 0
out of these objects = coefficient of x r in the expansion
xiv. Two points form :- the equation of a line passing iv. The necessary and sufficient condition 𝑎𝑥 2 +
of
x x2 xl x x2 through the points 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 to represent a
r! (1 + + + … … . . + ) (1 + + + y −y
1! 2! l! 1! 2! (x1 , y1 )and (x2 , y2 )is given by (y − y1 ) = 2 1 (x − pair of straight lines, if 𝑎𝑏𝑐 + 2𝑓𝑔ℎ − 𝑎𝑓 2 −
x2 −x1
xm x x2 xn
….+ ) (1 + + + ….+ ) x1 ) 𝑎 ℎ 𝑔
m! 1! 2! n!
This equation can be determined by the determinant 𝑏𝑔2 − 𝑐ℎ2 = 0 or | ℎ 𝑏 𝑓 | = 0 ,
Co-ordinate x y 1 𝑔 𝑓 𝑐
method, that is |x1 y1 1| = 0
x2 y2 1
v. 𝑖𝑓 (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) 𝑖𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑎𝑖𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑔ℎ
Rectangular Axis and Straight Lines line then , The equation of bisectors of the angles
Coordinate geometry: - The branch of mathematics in 𝑻𝒉𝒆 𝒊𝒏𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒑𝒕 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎 ∶ − the equation of a line which
between the lines represented 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 +
which geometrical problem is solved through algebra cuts off intercept a and b respectively on the X and Y –
x y 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 are given by
by using the coordinate system is known as axis is given by + =1 (𝑥−𝑥1 )2 −(𝑦−𝑦1 )2 (𝑥−𝑥1 )(𝑦−𝑦1 )
a b = ,
coordinate geometry. The general equation Ax + By + C = 0 can be converted 𝑎−𝑏 ℎ
Distance formula:- into the intercept form, as
x
C +
y
C = 1
vi. The general equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 +
(a) Distance between two points − A
− B 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 will represented two parallel
P(x1 , y1 ) and Q(x2 , y2 ),is xv. The Normal Form :- the equation of a straight line 𝑎 ℎ 𝑔
lines is , 𝑔2 − 𝑎𝑐 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 = = and
√{(x2 − x1 )2 + (y2 − y1 )2 } upon which the length of the perpendicular form the ℎ 𝑏 𝑓
origin is p and angle made by this perpendicular to 2√𝑔2 −𝑎𝑐 2√𝑓 2 −𝑏𝑐
(b)If points are (r1 , θ1 )and (r2 , θ2 ),then distance the distance between them is 𝑜𝑟 .
the X-axis is α,is given by x cos α + √𝑎(𝑎+𝑏) √𝑏(𝑎+𝑏)
between them is √ r12 + r22 − 2r1 r2 cos(θ1 − θ2 )
(c) Distance of a point (x1 , y1 ) from the origin is
y sin α = p vii. If the equation of a pair of straight lines is 𝑎𝑥 2 +
xvi. The distance (parametric) Form:- the equation of a 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0,then the point
√x12 + y12 straight line passing through (x1 , y1 ) and making an ℎ𝑓−𝑏𝑔 𝑔ℎ−𝑎𝑓
of intersection is given by ( , )
Section formula angle θ with the positive of x-axis , iss
x−x1
=
y−y1
=r
2 2 𝑎𝑏−ℎ 𝑎𝑏−ℎ
(d) The coordinate of the point which divides the
where r is the distance between two points
cos θ sin θ
viii. The equation of the pair of lines through the
joint of (x1 , y1 ) and (x2 , y2 ) in the ratio origin and perpendicular to the pair of lines
(m x +m x ) (m y +m y ) P(x , y )and Q(x1 , y1 ).
m1 : m2 internally , is 1 2 2 1 , 1 2 2 1 and given by 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 = 0 𝑖𝑠 𝑏𝑥 2 −
m1 +m2 (m1 +m2 ) Thus, the coordinate of any point on the line at a distance
(m1 x2 −m2 x1 ) (m1 y2 −m2 y1 ) 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑎𝑦 2 = 0
Externally is , r from the given point (x , y) are (x1 + rcosθ, y1 +
m1 −m2 (m1 −m2 )
r sin θ). ix. Equation of straight line having the origin to the
(e) X- axis divides the line segment joining (x1 , y1 ) and Position of point(s) Relative to a given Line points of intersection of a second degree curve
(x2 , y2 ) in the ratio – y1 : y2 . Similarly , Y-axis divide xvii. Two points are on the same side of the straight line 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 and a
the same line segment in the ratio-x1 : x2 ax + by + c = 0, if ax1 + by1 + c and ax2 + by2 + c straight line 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 𝑖𝑠 𝑎𝑥 2 +
(f) Mid – point of the joint of (x1 , y1 ) and (x2 , y2 ) is 𝑙𝑥+𝑚𝑦 𝑙𝑥+𝑚𝑦
x1 +x2 y1 +y2 Have the same sign. 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 ( ) + 2𝑓𝑦 ( )+
, −𝑛 −𝑛
2 2 xviii. The two points are on the opposite side of the 𝑙𝑥+𝑚𝑦 2
(g) 𝐶𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑜𝑖𝑑 of ∆ABC with vertices straight line ax + by + c = 0,if ax1 + by1 + c and 𝑐( ) = 0.
−𝑛
x +x +x y +y +y ax2 + by2 + c have opposite sign.
(x1 , y1 ), (x2 , y2 )and (x3 , y3 ) is ( 1 2 3 , 1 2 3 ). Important points to be remembered
3 3
xix. A point (x1 , y1 ) will on the side of the origin relative (I)A triangle is an isosceles, if any two of its median are
(h)𝐶𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 of ∆ABC with vertices
to a line ax + by + c = 0,if ax1 + by1 + c and c have equal.
A(x1 , y1 ), B(x2 , y2 )and C(x3 , y3 ), is
(x1sin2A+x2 sin2B+x3 sin2C) (y1 sin2A+y2 sin2B+y3 sin2C) the same sign. (II)In an equilateral triangle , orthocenter , 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑜𝑖𝑑,
, xx. A point (x1 , y1 ) will lie on the opposite side of the 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 , 𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 coincide.
sin2A+sin2B+sin2C sin2A+sin2B+sin2C
origin relative to a line ax + by + c = 0, If ax1 + by1 + (III)The 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 of a right angled triangle is the mid-
c and c have the opposite sign. point of the hypotenuse.

Page 6
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
(IV)Orthocentre , 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑜𝑖𝑑, divides the line joining (ii)If 𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐 = 0, then the radius of the circle is 0 xxxiv. Chord of contact 𝑇𝑇 ′ of two tangents , drawn from
orthocentre 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 in the ratio 2:1. and the circle is known as point circle. 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 is
(V)If D , E and F are the mid -point of the sides BC , CA and (iii) If 𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐 < 0, then the radius of the circle is 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 = 𝑟 2 𝑜𝑟 𝑇 = 0. similarly, for the circle
AB of ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶, then the centroid of ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶=centroid of ∆𝐷𝐸𝐹. imaginary. Such a circle is imaginary, which is not 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 𝑖𝑠
(VI)Orthocentre of the right angled ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶,right angled at A possible to draw. 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 + 𝑔(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ) + f(𝑦 + 𝑦1 ) + 𝑐 = 0
is A. Position of a point with respect to a circle Equation of chord bisected at a given point
(VII) 𝐶𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 of the right angled ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶,right angled at A point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) 𝑙𝑖𝑒𝑠 outside, on or inside a circle xxxv. Equation of chord of the circle 𝑆 = 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 +
𝐵+𝐶
is . 𝑆 = 𝑥 2 + y 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 According as 𝑆1 > 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 bisected at the point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 )
2
, = 𝑜𝑟 < 0 where 𝑆1 = 𝑥12 + 𝑦12 + 2𝑔𝑥1 + 2𝑓𝑦1 + 𝑐 is given by 𝑇 = 𝑆1
(VIII)The distance of a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 )𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 the 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 +
𝑎𝑥 +𝑏𝑦 +𝑐 Intercepts on the axes xxxvi. Director circle :- the locus of the point of
𝑐=0 is 𝑑 = | 1 2 12 | The length of the intercepts made by the circle 𝑥 2 + intersection of the two perpendicular tangents to
√𝑎 +𝑏
(IX)Distance between two parallel lines 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 y + 𝑐1 = 0 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 = 𝑐 = 0 with X and Y-axis are a given circle is called a director circle for circle
𝑐 −𝑐
and 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 y + 𝑐2 = 0 is given by | 22 1 2 | 2√𝑔2 − 𝑐 And 2√𝑓 2 − 𝑐 . 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 , the equation of director circle is
√𝑎 +𝑏
xii. If 𝑔2 > 𝑐, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑡𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑥 2 + 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 2𝑟 2
(X)The area of a triangle formed by the lines 𝑦 = 𝑚1 𝑥 +
2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 are real and distinct , so the xxxvii. Common chord :- the chord joining the points of
𝑐1 , 𝑦 = 𝑚2 𝑥 + 𝑐2 and intersection of two given circle is called common
1 (𝑐1 −𝑐2 )2 circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 = 𝑐 = 0 meets the X-
𝑦 = 𝑚3 𝑥 + 𝑐3 𝑖𝑠 ∆= |∑ | chord
2 𝑚1 −𝑚2 axis in two real and distinct points.
𝑆1 − 𝑆2 = 0
(XI)Area of the triangle formed by the line 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 xiii. If 𝑔2 = 𝑐, then the roots of the equation 𝑥 2 + Common chord
𝑐2 2𝑔𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0 are real and equal, so the circle
with the coordinate axes is ∆=
2|𝑎𝑏|
touches X-axis , then intercept on X-axis is 0.
(XII)The foot of the perpendicular (ℎ, 𝑘) from (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the
xiv. If 𝑔2 < 𝑐, then the roots of the equation 𝑥 2 +
line 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0is given by
ℎ−𝑥1 𝑘−𝑦1 𝑎𝑥 +𝑏𝑦 +𝑐 2𝑔𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0 are imaginary, so the given circle
= = − 1 2 12 does not meet X-axis in real point. Similarly, the
𝑎 𝑏 𝑎 +𝑏
(XIII)Area of the rhombus formed by 𝑎𝑥 ± 𝑏𝑦 ± 𝑐 = circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 cuts the Y-axis
2𝑐 2 in real and distinct points touches or does not
0 𝑖𝑠 | |
𝑎𝑏 meet in real point according to 𝑓 2 >, = 𝑜𝑟 < 𝑐
(XIV)Area of the parallelogram formed by the line 𝑎1 𝑥 +
Equation of tangent
𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = 0 , 𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑐2 = 0 , 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑑1 = Points form 𝑆1 = x 2 + y 2 + 2𝑔1 x + 2𝑓1 y + 𝑐1 = 0
0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑑2 = 0 𝑖𝑠
(𝑑 −𝑐 )(𝑑 −𝑐 )
| 1 1 2 2| 𝑆2 = x 2 + y 2 + 2𝑔2 x + 2𝑓2 y + 𝑐2 = 0
𝑎1 𝑏2 −𝑎2 𝑏1 xv. The equation of the tangent at the point 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 )
xxxviii. If 𝑐1 , c2 denote the centre of the given intersecting
(XV) Foot of the perpendicular form (𝑎, 𝑏)𝑜𝑛 𝑥 − 𝑦 = to a circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 is circles , then common chord 𝑃𝑄 = 2𝑃𝑀 =
𝑎+𝑏 𝑎+𝑏 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 + 𝑔(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ) + 𝑓(𝑦 + 𝑦1 ) + 𝑐 = 0
0 𝑖𝑠 ( , ) 2√(𝐶1 𝑃)2 − (𝐶1 𝑀)2
2 2 xvi. The equation of the tangent at the point 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 )
Foot of the perpendicular form (a ,b) on 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 0 is xxxix. If 𝑟1 and 𝑟2 be the radii of arthogonally intersecting
to a circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 is 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 = 𝑟 2 . 2𝑟1 𝑟2
𝑎−𝑏 𝑎−𝑏 two circle , then length of common chord is .
( , ) Slope form √𝑟12 +𝑟22
2 2
(XVI)The image of the line 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = xvii. The equation of the tangent of the slope m to the Angle of intersection of two circles
0 𝑎𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑡 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 𝑖𝑠 2(𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑏𝑏1 )(𝑎𝑥 + circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 are 𝑦 + 𝑓 = 𝑟12 +𝑟22 −𝑑2
𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 =
𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐) = (𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 )(𝑎1 𝑥 + b1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 ) 𝑚(𝑥 + 𝑔) + √(𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐)(1 + 𝑚2 ) 2𝑟1 𝑟2
𝑟1 = radius of 𝑐1 , 𝑟2 = radius of 𝑐2 ,d=distance between
(XVII)Given two vertices (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) and (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ) of an xviii. The equation of the tangents of slope m to the
𝑐1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐2
equilateral ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 ,then its third vertex is given by circle (𝑥 − 𝑎)2 + (𝑦 − 𝑏)2 = 𝑟 2 are 𝑦 − 𝑏 =
xl. Orthogonal circles: - two circle are said to be
𝑥1 +𝑥2 ±√3(𝑦1 −𝑦2 ) 𝑦1 +𝑦2 ∓√3(𝑥1 −𝑥2 ) 𝑚(𝑥 − 𝑎) ± 𝑟√1 + 𝑚2 , coordinate of the points of
.[ , ] intersection orthogonally, if their angle of intersect is a
2 2
contact are right angle .2𝑔1 𝑔2 + 2𝑓1 𝑓2 = 𝑐1 + 𝑐2
1. The equation of straight line which is passes through 𝑚𝑟 𝑟
a given point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) and makes an angle 𝛼 with the given (𝑎 ± ,𝑏 ∓ ) xli. Family of circles: - the equation of family circles
√1+𝑚 2 √1+𝑚 2
straight line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 are passing through the intersection of a circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 +
𝑚±𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝛼
xix. The equation of the tangents of the slope m to the 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0, 𝑆 + 𝜆𝐿 = 0 where 𝜆 is any real
(𝑦 − 𝑦1 ) = (𝑥 − 𝑥1 ) circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 are 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 ± 𝑟√1 + 𝑚2 and
1∓𝑚 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝛼 number. 𝐿 = 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0
2. The equation of the family of the line passing the coordinates of the point of contact are xlii. The equation of the family of circles passing through
through the intersection of the lines 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = 0 and 𝑟𝑚 𝑟 the point 𝐴(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐵(𝑥2 , 𝑦2 )𝑖𝑠 (𝑥 − 𝑥1 )(𝑥 − 𝑥2 ) +
(± ,∓ )
𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑐2 = 0 is (𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 ) + 𝜆(𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑐2 ) = 0 √1+𝑚2 √1+𝑚2 𝑥 𝑦 1
where 𝜆 is any real number. Parametric form (𝑦 − 𝑦1 )(𝑦 − 𝑦2 ) + 𝜆 |𝑥1 𝑦1 1| = 0
3. Line 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 divides the line joining the xx. The equation of the tangent to the circle 𝑥2 𝑦2 1
points 𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ) in the ration 𝜆: 1 (𝑥 − 𝑎)2 + (𝑦 − 𝑏)2 = 𝑟 2 at the point xliii. The equation of the family of circles touching the circle
𝑎𝑥 +𝑏𝑦 +𝑐
λ = − 𝑎𝑥1+𝑏𝑦1 +𝑐 . if 𝜆 is positive it divides (𝑎 + 𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃, 𝑏 + 𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃) is (𝑥 − 𝑎) 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 + 2 2
𝑆 = 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 at point 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is
2 2
internally and if a 𝜆 is negative , then it divides externally (𝑦 − 𝑏) 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑟 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 + 𝜆[𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 + 𝑔(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ) +
4. Area of a polygon of n – sides with vertices Equation of normal Points form 𝑓(𝑦 + 𝑦1 ) + 𝑐] = 0Or 𝑆 + 𝜆𝐿 = 0, where L=0 is the
1 𝑥1 𝑦1 𝑥2 𝑦2 xxi. The equation of normal at the point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the equation of tangent to 𝑆 = 0 𝑎𝑡 (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜆 ∈ 𝑅
𝐴1 (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ), 𝐴2 (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ), … … . , 𝐴𝑛 (𝑥𝑛 , 𝑦𝑛 ) = 2 [|𝑥 𝑦 | + |𝑥 𝑦 | + xliv. Any circle passing through the point of intersection of
2 2 3 3 circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 is (𝑦 − 𝑦1 ) =
𝑥𝑛 𝑦𝑛 𝑦1 +𝑓 two circles 𝑆1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆2 is 𝑠1 + 𝜆𝑠2 = 0, 𝜆 ≠ −1
… … + | 𝑥 𝑦 |] (𝑥 − 𝑥1 )
1 1 𝑥1 +𝑔 xlv. Radical Axis :- the equation of radical axis of two
5. Equation of the pair of lines through (𝛼, 𝛽) and xxii. The equation of normal at the point(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the circles 𝑆1 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆2 = 0 𝑖𝑠 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑏𝑦 𝑆1 − 𝑆2 = 0.
perpendicular to the pair of lines 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 = 0 𝑖𝑠 𝑥 𝑦
circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 𝑖𝑠 =
𝑏(𝑥 − 𝛼)2 − 2ℎ(𝑥 − 𝛼)(𝑦 − 𝛽) + 𝑎(𝑦 − 𝛽)2 = 0 𝑥1 𝑦1 a.The radical axis of two circle is always perpendicular
44. Circles Parametric form to the line joining the centers of the circle
Standard forms of a circle:- xxiii. The equation of the normal to the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = b. The radical axis of three circle , whose centres are
𝑥 𝑦
i. Equation of circle having centre (ℎ , 𝑘) and radius a is 𝑟 2 at the point (𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 , 𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃) 𝑖𝑠 = non-collinear taken in pair are concurrent.
𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
(𝑥 − ℎ)2 + (𝑦 − 𝑘)2 = 𝑎2 if centre is (0 ,0) the c. The centre of the circle cutting two given circles
Important point to be remember
equation is 𝑥 2 + y 2 = 𝑎2 orthogonally, lies on their radical axis .
xxiv. The line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 meets the circle in unique
ii. When the circle passes through the origin, then xlvi. Radical centre :- the point of intersection of radical
equation of circle is real point or touch the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 , if 𝑟 =
𝑐
axis of three circles whose centre are non – collinear ,
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2ℎ𝑥 − 2𝑘𝑦 = 0. | 2
|And the point of contacts are taken in pairs , is called their radical centre.
√1+𝑚
iii. When the circle touches the X-axis , the equation is ±𝑚𝑟 ∓𝑟 Important points to be remembered
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2ℎ𝑥 − 2𝑎𝑦 + ℎ2 = 0. ( , ) xlvii. Length of intercept cut off from the line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 by
√1+𝑚2 √1+𝑚2
iv. Equation of the circle , touching the Y-axis is 𝑥 2 + xxv. The line 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 touches the circle 𝑥 2 + √𝑎 2(1+𝑚 2 )−𝑐 2
the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 is 2
𝑦 2 − 2𝑎𝑥 − 2𝑘𝑦 + 𝑘 2 = 0. 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑟 2 (𝑙 2 + 𝑚2 ) = 𝑛2 √1+𝑚 2
v. Equation of the circle , touching both axes is 𝑥 2 + xxvi. Tangent at the 𝑝(𝑟 cos 𝜃 , r sin θ) to the circle 𝑥 2 + xlviii. Pole of 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 with respect to 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 =
𝑎2𝑙 𝑎2𝑚
𝑦 2 − 2𝑎𝑥 − 2𝑎𝑦 + 𝑎2 = 0. 𝑦 2 = 𝑟 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 + 𝑦 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑟 a2 𝑖𝑠 (− 𝑛 , − 𝑛 )
vi. Equation of the circle passing through the origin and xxvii. The point of intersection of the tangent at the xlix. Lets 𝑆1 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆2 = 0 be two circles with radii 𝑟1 , 𝑟2 ,
centre lying on the X-axis is 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2𝑎𝑥 = 0. points 𝑃(𝜃1 ) and 𝑄(𝜃2 ) on the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑆 𝑆
then 𝑟1 ± 𝑟2 = 0 will meet at right angle .
vii. Equation of the circle passing through the origin and 𝜃1+𝜃2 𝜃1+𝜃2 1 2
𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( ) 𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛( )
centre lying on the Y-axis is 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 2𝑎𝑦 = 0. 𝑟 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑔𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑏𝑦 𝑥 = 2
𝜃1−𝜃2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 2
𝜃1−𝜃2
l. The angle between the two tangents from (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to
𝑐𝑜𝑠( ) 𝑐𝑜𝑠( ) 𝑎
viii. Equation of the circle through the origin and cutting 2 2 the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 is 2 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1
√𝑆1
intercept a and b on the coordinate axes is 𝑥 2 + xxviii. Normal at any point on the circle is a straight line
li. Image of the circle by the line minor (𝑥 − 𝑥1 )2 +
𝑦 2 − ax − 𝑏𝑦 = 0. which is perpendicular to the tangent to the curve
ix. Equation of the circle , when the coordinates of end (𝑦 − 𝑦1 )2 = 𝑟 2 where 𝑟 = √𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐
at the point and it passes through the centre of
points of a diameter are (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) and (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ) is lii. Common tangents of two circles
circle
(𝑥 − 𝑥1 )(𝑥 − 𝑥2 ) + (𝑦 − 𝑦1 )(𝑦 − 𝑦2 ) = 0. a. When one circle contains another circle, no common
xxix. Power of a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) with respect to the circle
x. Equation of the circle passes through three given tangent is possible 𝐶1 𝐶2 < 𝑟1 −𝑟2
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 is 𝑥12 + 𝑦12 + 2𝑔𝑥1 + b. When two circles touch internally, one common
points (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ), (𝑥2 , 𝑦2 )𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝑥3 , 𝑦3 ) is 2𝑓𝑦1 + 𝑐 tangent is possible 𝐶1 𝐶2 = 𝑟1 − 𝑟2
𝑥2 + 𝑦2 𝑥 𝑦 1 xxx. If P is a point and C is the centre of a circle of
2 2 c. When two circles intersect , two common tangents are
||𝑥12 + 𝑦12 𝑥1 𝑦1 1|| = 0 radius r then maximum distance of P from circle is possible |𝑟1 − 𝑟2 | < 𝐶1 𝐶2 < |𝑟1 + 𝑟2 |
𝑥2 + 𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2 1 𝐶𝑃 + 𝑟 and minimum distance 𝐶𝑃 − d. When two circles touch externally, three common
𝑥32 + 𝑦33 𝑥3 𝑦3 1 𝑟 , 𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑦. tangents are possible 𝐶1 𝐶2 = |𝑟1 + 𝑟2 |
xi. Parametric equation of a circle (𝑥 − ℎ)2 + xxxi. If a line is perpendicular to the radius of a circle e. When two circles are separately, four common
(𝑦 − 𝑘)2 = 𝑎2 is at its end points on the circle , then the line is a tangents are possible. 𝐶1 𝐶2 > 𝑟1 + 𝑟2
𝑥 = ℎ + 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑘 + 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃, 0 ≤ 𝜃 ≤ 2𝜋 for circle tangent to the circle and vice versa.
liii. Parabola
𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 , parametric equation is 𝑥= Pair of tangents
Conic section :- a conic is the locus of a point whose distance
𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 xxxii. The combine equation of the pair of tangents
from a fixed point bears a constant ratio to its distance
General equation of a circle drown 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = from a fixed line . the fixed point is the focus S and the
The general equation of a circle is given by 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 𝑟 2 𝑖𝑠 𝑆𝑆1 = 𝑇 2 fixed line is directrix . the constant ratio is called the
2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 where centre of the circle =(-g 𝑇 = 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑦𝑦1 − 𝑟 2 , 𝑆 = 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 − 𝑟 2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆1 = eccentricity denoted by e
,-f) and radius of the circle =√𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐 𝑥1 2 + 𝑦1 2 − 𝑟 2 If 0<e<1, Ellipse
(i)If 𝑔2 + 𝑓 2 − 𝑐 >0, then the radius of the circle is real xxxiii. The length of the tangents from the point
and hence the circle is also real. 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ), to the circle 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + 2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = e =1 Parabola
0 is equal to √𝑥12 + 𝑦12 + 2𝑔𝑥1 + 2𝑓𝑦1 + 𝑐 = √𝑆1
e>1 Hyperbola

Page 7
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
General Equation of conic 19) The straight line 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 touches 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥, v. The circle described on any real focal chord of a
If fixed point of curve is (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) and fixed line 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + iff 𝑛𝑙 = 𝑎𝑚2 and 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝛼 + 𝑦 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝛼 = 𝑝 touches 𝑦 2 = parabola as diameter touches tangent at vertex.
𝑐 = 0 then equation of the conic is 4𝑎𝑥, if 𝑝 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝛼 + 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝛼 = 0. vi. If 𝑦1 , 𝑦2 , 𝑦3 are the ordinates of the vertices of a
(𝑎2 + 𝑏2 )[(𝑥 − 𝑥1 )2 + (𝑦 − 𝑦1 )2 ] = 𝑒 2 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐)2 20) Angle 𝜃 between tangents at two points 𝑃(𝑎𝑡12 ,2𝑎𝑡1 ) triangle inscribed in the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥, then its
A second degree equation 𝑎𝑥 2 + 2ℎ𝑥𝑦 + 𝑏𝑦 2 + 2𝑔𝑥 + and 𝑄(𝑎𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 ) on the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 is given by 1
area is |(𝑦1 − 𝑦2 )(𝑦2 − 𝑦3 )(𝑦3 − 𝑦1 )|.
𝑡 −𝑡 8𝑎
2𝑓𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0 represents 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = | 2 1 |
𝑎 ℎ 𝑔 1+𝑡1𝑡2 45. Ellipse
21) The combine equation of the pair of tangents drawn Major and minor axes :- the line segment through the foci of the
liv. Pair of straight lines, if ∆= |ℎ 𝑏 𝑓 | = 0
from a point to a parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 is given by 𝑆𝑆1 = ellipse with its end points on the ellipse, is called its major axis.
𝑔 𝑓 𝑐
𝑇 2 where ,𝑆 = 𝑦 2 − 4𝑎𝑥 , 𝑆1 = 𝑦12 − 4𝑎𝑥1 and The line segment through the centre and perpendicular to the
lv. Circle , if 𝑎 = 𝑏 , ℎ = 0 𝑇 = [𝑦𝑦1 − 2𝑎(𝑥 + 𝑥1 )] major axis with its end points on the ellipse , is called its minor
2
lvi. Parabola, if ℎ = 𝑎𝑏 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆≠ 0 22) Important Result on tangents axis
lvii. Ellipse, if ℎ2 < 𝑎𝑏 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆≠ 0 i. The tangent at any point on a parabola bisected the 𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐
lviii. Rectangular hyperbola , if 𝑎 + 𝑏 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆≠ 0  Horizontal Ellipse 𝟐
+ 𝟐 = 𝟏 (𝟎 < 𝑏 < 𝑎) 𝒂 𝒃
angle between the focal distance of the point and the
Standard forms of a parabola and related terms perpendicular on the 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥 from the point . vertex 𝐴(𝑎, 0), 𝐴(−𝑎, 0)
Terms 𝒀𝟐 = 𝟒𝒂𝒙 𝒚𝟐 𝒙𝟐 = 𝟒𝒂𝒚 𝒙𝟐 ii. The tangent at the extremities of a focal chord of a Centre (0, 0)
= −𝟒𝒂𝒙 = −𝟒𝒂𝒚 parabola intersect at right angle on the 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥
Major axis 𝐴𝐴1 = 2𝑎
vertex 𝐴(0,0) 𝐴(0,0) 𝐴(0,0) 𝐴(0,0) iii. The portion of the tangent to parabola cut off between
Focus 𝑆(𝑎 ,0) 𝑆(−𝑎, 0) 𝑆(0, 𝑎) 𝑆(0, −𝑎) the directrix and the curve subtends a right angle at Minor axis 𝐵𝐵1 = 2𝑏
Equatio 𝑦=0 𝑦=0 𝑥=0 𝑥=0 the focus. Foci 𝑆(𝑎𝑒, 0)𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆 ′ (−𝑎𝑒, 0)
n of axis iv. The perpendicular drawn from the focus on any 𝑎 𝑎
tangent to parabola intersect it at the point where it Directrices 𝑙: 𝑥 = , 𝑙 ′ ; 𝑥 = −
Equatio 𝑥+𝑎 𝑥−𝑎 𝑦+𝑎 𝑦−𝑎 𝑒 𝑒
n of =0 =0 =0 =0 cuts the tangent at the vertex .
directri v. The orthocenter of any triangle formed by three Latusrectum 2𝑏2
tangents to a parabola lies on the 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥 𝐿𝐿1 = 𝐿′ 𝐿′1 =
x 𝑎
vi. The 𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑢𝑚𝑐𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑙𝑒 formed by the intersection points of
Eccentri e=1 e=1 e=1 e=1 Eccentricity
tangents at any three points on a parabola passes 𝑒 = √1 − 𝑎2 < 1
𝑏2
city
through the focus of the parabola
Extremi (𝑎, ±2𝑎) (−𝑎, ±2𝑎) (±2𝑎, 𝑎) (±2𝑎, −𝑎) Focal distance |𝑎 − 𝑒𝑥| 𝑎𝑛𝑑| 𝑎 + 𝑒𝑥|.
vii. The tangent at any point of a parabola is equally
ties of 𝑆𝑃 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆1 𝑃 𝑆𝑃 + 𝑆1 𝑃 = 2𝑎
inclined to the focal distance of the point and the axis
letusrec = 𝑚𝑎𝑗𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠 .
of the parabola.
tum
viii. The length of the sub tangent at any point on a Distance between foci = 2𝑎𝑒
Length 4a 4a 4a 4a parabola is equal to twice the abscissa of the point
of Distance between 2𝑎
ix. Two tangents can be drawn from a point to a parabola. =
equatio 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑒
two tangents are real and distinct or coincide or
n imaginary according as given point lies outside , on or 𝑥2 𝑦2
letusrec  Vertical Ellipse:- 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1 0 < 𝑎 < 𝑏
inside the parabola.
tum Equation of normal Vertices 𝐵(0, 𝑏), 𝐵1 (0 , −𝑏)
Equa of 𝑥=0 𝑥=0 𝑦=0 𝑦=0 x. Point form the equation of the normal at the Centre 𝑂(0,0)
tangent parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 at a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is given by 𝑦 −
s at 𝑦
Major axis 𝐵𝐵1 = 2𝑏;
𝑦1 = − 1 (𝑥 − 𝑥1 ). Minor 𝐴𝐴1 = 2𝑎
vertex 2𝑎

Parame (𝑎𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑡) (−𝑎𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑡) (2𝑎𝑡 , 𝑎𝑡 2 ) (2𝑎𝑡, −𝑎𝑡 2 ) xi. Parametric form the equation of the normal to the Foci 𝑆(0, 𝑎𝑒) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑆1 (0, −𝑎𝑒)
parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 at point (𝑎𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑡) is given by 𝑦 + 𝑏 𝑏
tric Directrices
𝑡𝑥 = 2𝑎𝑡 + 𝑎𝑡 3 . 𝑙: 𝑦 = ; 𝑙 ′ : 𝑦 = −
equatio 𝑒 𝑒
n xii. Slope form the equation of the normal to the parabola 2
Latusrectum 2𝑎
𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 in terms of its slope m is given by 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 − 𝐿𝐿1 = 𝐿′ 𝐿′1 =
Focal ℎ+𝑎 a−h 𝑘+𝑎 a−k 𝑏
2𝑎𝑚 − 𝑎𝑚3 at point (𝑎𝑚2 , −2𝑎𝑚).
distance Eccentricity
Important Result on Normals 𝑎2
Equatio 𝑥=𝑎 𝑥+𝑎 𝑦=𝑎 𝑦+𝑎
23) If the normal at the point 𝑝(𝑎𝑡12 , 2𝑎𝑡1 ) meets the 𝑒 = √1 − <1
n of =0 =0 2 𝑏2
latusrec parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 at (𝑎𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 ) then 𝑡2 = −𝑡1 − 𝑡 .
1
Focal |𝑏 − 𝑒𝑥| 𝑎𝑛𝑑 |𝑏 + 𝑒𝑥|
tum 24) The tangent at one extremity of the focal chord of a
parabola is parallel to the normal at other extremity distances SP 𝑆𝑃 + 𝑆1 𝑃 = 2𝑏 = 𝑚𝑎𝑗𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑠
Other form of parabola
and 𝑆1 𝑃
If the vertex of the parabola is at a point 𝐴(ℎ, 𝑘) and its 25) The normal at points 𝑃(𝑎𝑡12 ,2𝑎𝑡1 ) and
latusrectum is of length 4a, then its equation is 𝑄(𝑎𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 )𝑜𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑎 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 intersect at Distance 2𝑏
=
1) (𝑦 − 𝑘)2 = 4𝑎(𝑥 − ℎ), 𝑖𝑡𝑠 𝑎six is parallel to OX i.e., the points[2𝑎 + 𝑎(𝑡12 + 𝑡22 + 𝑡1 𝑡2 )], −𝑎𝑡1 𝑡2 (𝑡1 + 𝑡2 ). between 𝑒
open rightward 26) If the normal at points 𝑃 (𝑎𝑡12 , 2𝑎𝑡1 )𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑄(a𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 ) directrices
2) (𝑦 − 𝑘)2 = −4𝑎(𝑥 − ℎ), its axis is parallel to OX ′ i.e., on the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 meet on the parabola, then i. Special Form of Ellipse:- if centre of the ellipse is (ℎ, 𝑘)
parabola open leftward 𝑡1 𝑡2 = 2 and the direction of the axes are parallel to the
(𝑥 − ℎ)2 = 4𝑎(𝑦 − 𝑘) , its axis is parallel to 𝑂𝑌 i.e., 27) If the normal at two points P and Q of a parabola 𝑦 2 = (𝑥−ℎ)2
3) coordinate axes, then its equation is +
4𝑎𝑥 intersect at a third point R on the curve , then the 𝑎2
parabola open upward . (𝑦−𝑘)2
4) (𝑥 − ℎ)2 = −4𝑎(𝑦 − 𝑘), Its axis is parallel to 𝑂𝑌 ′ i.e., product of the ordinates of P and Q is 8𝑎2 . =1𝑏2
parabola open downward 28) If the normal chord at a points 𝑃(𝑎𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑡) to the ii. Position of a point with respect to an ellipse :- the point
5) The general equation of a parabola whose axis is parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 subtends a right angle at the vertex 𝑥2
(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) lies outside, on or inside the ellipse 2 +
parallel to X-axis is 𝑥 = 𝑎𝑦 2 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 and the general of the parabola, then 𝑡 2 = 2. 𝑎
𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2
equation of a parabola whose axis is parallel to Y- axis 29) The normal chord of a parabola at a point whose = 1 according as 𝑎12 + 𝑏12 − 1 > 0, = 𝑜𝑟 < 0.
𝑏2
is 𝑦 = 𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐. ordinate is equal to the abscissa, subtends a right angle 𝑥2 𝑦2
at the focus. iii. Auxiliary circle :- the ellipse 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1 becomes
6) Position of a point :- the point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) lies outside ,
inside or on the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 according as 𝑦12 − 30) The normal at any point of a parabola is equally 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 𝑖𝑓 𝑏 = 𝑎
4𝑎𝑥1 > , =, < 0. inclined to the focal radius of the point and the axis of iv. Director circle :- the locus of the point of intersection of
Chord the parabola. perpendicular tangents to an ellipse is a directeor
𝑥2 𝑦2
7) Parametric equation of a chord :- lets 𝑃(𝑎𝑡12 ,2𝑎𝑡1 ) and 31) Three distinct normals can be drawn from a point to a circle if equation of an ellipse is 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1, then
𝑄(𝑎𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 ) be any two points on the parabola 𝑦 2 = parabola. equation of director circle is 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑏2
4𝑎𝑥 then the equation of the chord is 32) The points on the parabola at which the normal pass
2𝑎𝑡 −2𝑎𝑡
v. Parametric Equation :- 𝑥 = 𝑎 c𝑜𝑠 ∅ , 𝑦 = 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ∅
(𝑦 − 2𝑎𝑡1 ) = 22 21 (𝑥 − 𝑎𝑡12 ) 𝑜𝑟 𝑦(𝑡1 + 𝑡2 ) = 2𝑥 + through a common point are called co normal points. vi. Equation of chord :-Let 𝑃(𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃, 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃) and
𝑎𝑡 −𝑎𝑡
2 1 The conarmal points are called the feet of the normal’s 𝑄(𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ∅, 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ∅) be any two points of the ellipse
2𝑎𝑡1 𝑡2 2𝑎
Equation of Diameter 𝑦 = 𝑚 𝑥2 𝑦2
8) Lets 𝑃(𝑎𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑡 ) be the one end point of a focal chord + 𝑏2 = 1
Pole and Polar 𝑎2
PQ of the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 , then the coordinate of The equation of the chord joining these points will be
𝑎 2𝑎 33) .the polar of a point 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) with respect to the
the other end Q are (𝑡 2 , − 𝑡 ) (𝑦 − 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃) =
(𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ∅−𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃)
(𝑥 − 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃)
parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 is 𝑦𝑦1 = 2𝑎(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ) or 𝑇 = 0. (𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ∅−𝑎 cos 𝜃)
9) If 𝑙1 and 𝑙2 are the focal segment, then length of the 34) Any tangent is the polar of its point of contact. 𝑥 𝜃+∅ 𝑦 𝜃+∅ 𝜃−∅
𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑢𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑚 =2(harmonic mean of focal segment ). Or 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( ) + 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ( ) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( )
35) Pole of 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 with respect to 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 is 𝑎 2 𝑏 2 2
4𝑙1 𝑙2
i.e., 4𝑎 = 𝑙 +𝑙 𝑛 2𝑎𝑚 The equation of the chord of contact of tangents drawn
1 2
(𝑙 , − 𝑙 ) 𝑥2 𝑦2
10) For a chord joining points 𝑃(𝑎𝑡12 , 2𝑎𝑡1 ) and from a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the ellipse + 𝑏2 = 1 is
36) Pole of the chord joining (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) and 𝑄(𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ) is 𝑥𝑥1 𝑦𝑦1
𝑎2
𝑄(𝑎𝑡22 , 2𝑎𝑡2 ) and passing through focus chord , then 𝑦1𝑦2 𝑦1 +𝑦2 + =1 or T = 0
( 4𝑎 , 2 ). 𝑎2 𝑏2
𝑡1 𝑡2 = −1. 𝑥2 𝑦2
37) If the polar of 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) passes through Q(𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ), then The equation of chord of the ellipse 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1 bisected
11) Length of the focal chord having 𝑡1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑡2 as end
the polar of Q will passes through P here , P and Q are 𝑥2
points 𝑖𝑠 𝑎(𝑡2 − 𝑡1 )2 at the point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is given by
𝑥𝑥1
+
𝑦𝑦1
− 1 = 𝑎12 +
called conjugate points. 𝑎2 𝑏2
12) Chord of contact drawn from a point Y2
1
(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 )𝑡𝑜 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑎 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 is 𝑦𝑦1 = 38) If the pole of a line 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = 0 lies on another − 1 𝑜𝑟 𝑇 = 𝑆1
𝑏2
2𝑎(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ). line 𝑎2 𝑥 + 𝑏2 𝑦 + 𝑐2 = 0 then the pole of the second line vii. Equation of Tangent :-
13) Equation of the chord of the parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥, which will lies on the first line. Such lines are called conjugate 𝑥𝑥1 𝑦𝑦1
Point Form:- 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1
is bisected at (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is given by. lines.
39) The tangents at the ends of any chord of the parabola Slope form: - the equation of the tangent of slope m to the
𝑇 = 𝑆1 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑦𝑦1 − 2𝑎(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ).=𝑦12 − 4𝑎𝑥1 𝑥2 𝑦2
Equation of tangents meet on the diameter which bisects the chord. ellipse 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 = 1 are 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 ± √𝑎2 𝑚2 + 𝑏2 and
14) Points form: - the equation of the tangents to the 40) The point of intersection of the polar of two points Q the coordinates of the point of contact are
parabola 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 at a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is given by and R is the pole of QR. 𝑎2𝑚 𝑏2
(± √𝑎2 , ∓ √𝑎2 )
𝑦𝑦1 = 2𝑎(𝑥 + 𝑥1 ). 41) Important points to be remembered 𝑚 2+𝑏 2 𝑚 2+𝑏 2

15) Slope form 𝒚 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑚

𝑎 i. For the ends of latumsrectum of the parabola 𝑦 2 =
4𝑎𝑥, the values of the perimeter are ±1.
16) Parametric form the equation of the tangents to the ii. The circles described on focal radii of a parabola as
parabola 𝒚𝟐 = 4𝑎𝑥 at a point (𝑎t 2 , 2𝑎𝑡 ) is 𝑦𝑡 = 𝑥 + diameter touches the tangents at the vertex.
𝑎𝑡 2 . iii. The straight line 𝑌 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 meets the parabola
𝑎
17) The line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 touches a parabola , if 𝑐 = 𝑚 and 𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑥 in two points. These two points are real
𝑎 2𝑎 𝑎
the point of contact is [𝑚2 , 𝑚 ] and distinct , if 𝑐 > 𝑚, points are real and coincident ,
𝑎 𝑎
18) Point of intersection of two tangents let two tangents at if 𝑐 = 𝑚, points are imaginary , if 𝑐 < 𝑚.
𝑃(𝑎𝑡12 , 2𝑎𝑡1 ) and 𝑄(𝑎𝑡22 ,2𝑎𝑡2 ) intersection at R. then, iv. Area of the triangle formed by three points on a
their point of intersection is parabola is twice the area of the triangle formed by
𝑅[𝑎𝑡1 𝑡2 , 𝑎(𝑡1 + 𝑡2 )] 𝑖. 𝑒, (GM of abscissa AM of ordinate) the tangents at these points.

Page 8
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
viii. Point of intersection of two tangents :-the equation transverse axis of the hyperbola is called its xxv. 𝐼𝑓 𝜃1 𝜃2 , 𝜃3 are the eccentric angles of three points on
conjugate axis. 𝑥2 𝑦2
of the tangents to the ellipse at points the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 such that
𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐
𝑃(𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃1 , 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃1 )and 𝑄(𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃2 , 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃2 ) ii. Hyperbola of the form 𝒂𝟐 − 𝒃𝟐 = 𝟏 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃2 + 𝜃3 ) + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃3 + 𝜃1 ) = 0.
𝑥
are 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃1 + Then, the normal at these points are concurrent.
𝑎
𝑦 𝑥 𝑦 Centre 𝑂(0,0) xxvi. If the normals at four points
𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃1 = 1 and 𝑐o𝑠 𝜃2 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃2 = 1
𝑏 𝑎 𝑏 Foci are 𝑆(𝑎𝑒, 0), 𝑆1 (−𝑎𝑒, 0) 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ), 𝑄(𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ) , 𝑅(𝑥3 , 𝑦3 ) and 𝑆(𝑥4 , 𝑦4 ) on the
And these two intersection at the point Vertices 𝐴(𝑎, 0), 𝐴(−a, 𝑜) 𝑥2 𝑦2
𝜃1+𝜃2 𝜃1+𝜃2
𝑎 𝑎 hyperbola − = 1 are concurrent , then
𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠( ) 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛( ) Directrices 𝑎2 𝑏2
( 2
, 2
) 𝑙: 𝑥 = , 𝑙 ′ : 𝑥 = − (𝑥1 + 𝑥2 + 𝑥3 + 𝑥4 ) ( + + + ) = 4
1 1 1 1
𝜃 −𝜃
𝑐𝑜𝑠( 1 2 )
𝜃 −𝜃
𝑐𝑜𝑠( 1 2 ) 𝑒 𝑒 𝑥 𝑥 𝑥 𝑥
2 2 1 2 3 4
Length of 2𝑏2 xxvii. Conjugate points and conjugate Lines :-
ix. Equation of normal :- 𝐿𝐿1 = 𝐿′ 𝐿1 =
𝑎2 𝑥 𝑏2 𝑦 𝑙𝑒𝑡𝑢𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑚 𝑎 Two points are said to be conjugate points with respect to
x. Point form :- − = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 Length of transverse 2a.
𝑥1 𝑦1 a hyperbola, if each lies on the polar of the other.
xi. Parametric Form:-the equation of the normal to the axis Two Lines are said to be conjugate lines with respect to a
𝑥2 𝑦2 Length of conjugate 2b. 𝑥2 𝑦2
ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 𝑖𝑠 at (𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃, 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃) is hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 if each passes through the
𝑎 𝑏 axis
𝑎𝑥 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − 𝑏𝑦 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏 2 Eccentricity 𝑏 2
pole of the other.
xii. If the line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 is a normal to the ellipse 𝑒 = √1 + (𝑎) 𝑜𝑟 𝑏2 = xxviii. Diameter and conjugate diameter :-
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑚 2(𝑎2 −𝑏2 )2 𝑎 (𝑒 − 1) 2 2 Diameter :- the locus of the mid points of a system of
+ = 1, then 𝑐 2 = parallel chords of a hyperbola is called diameter
𝑎2 𝑏2 𝑎 2 +𝑏 2 𝑚2 Distance between 2ae
𝑚(𝑎 2−𝑏2 ) The equation of the diameter bisecting a system of parallel
xiii. Slope form:- 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 ± 2 2 2 foci
√𝑎 +𝑏 𝑚 𝑥2 𝑦2
And the coordinates of the point of contact are Distance between 2𝑎 chord of slope m to the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 is
𝑎2 𝑏2 𝑚 𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒𝑠 e 𝑏2
± 2 2 2 ,± 2 2 2 𝑦 = 𝑎 2𝑚 𝑥
√𝑎 +𝑏 𝑚 √𝑎 +𝑏 𝑚 iii. Focal distance of a point :- the distance of a point on the
xiv. Co normal Points : xxix. Conjugate diameter:-The diameters of a hyperbola are
hyperbola from the focus is called its focal distance.
said to be conjugate diameter, if each bisect the
xv. The sum of the eccentric angles of Co normal points The difference of the focal distance of any point on
𝑥2 𝑦2 chords parallel to the other.
on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is an odd multiple of a hyperbola is constant and is equal to the length of
The diameters 𝑦 = 𝑚1 𝑥 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 𝑚2 𝑥 are conjugate, if
𝑎 𝑏 transverse axis of the hyperbola i.e., (𝑆1 𝑃 − 𝑆𝑃) = 𝑏2
𝜋. 2𝑎 where , S and 𝑆1 are the foci and P is any point 𝑚1 𝑚2 = 𝑎2
xvi. If 𝜃1 , 𝜃2 , 𝜃3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜃4 are eccentric angles of four on the hyperbola. In a pair of conjugate diameter of a hyperbola, only one
points on the ellipse , the normal’s at which are iv. Equation of hyperbola in different form if the centre of meets the hyperbola in real points.
concurrent , then ∑ 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) = 0 hyperbola is (ℎ , 𝑘) and the directions of the axes xxx. Asymptote:- An asymptote to a curve is a straight line, at
∑ 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) = 0 are parallel to the coordinate axes, then the a finite form the origin to which the tangents to a
xvii. If 𝜃1 , 𝜃2 , 𝜃3 are the eccentric angles of three points equation of the hyperbola , whose transverse and curve tends as the points of contact goes to
𝑥2 𝑦2 (𝑥−ℎ)2 (𝑦−𝑘)2
conjugate axes are 2a and 2b is 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 infinity .
on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 such that 𝑥2 𝑦2
𝑎 𝑏
v. If a point 𝑃(𝑥 , 𝑦) moves in the plane of two Equation of two asymptote of the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 is
𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃2 + 𝜃3 ) + 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃3 + 𝜃1 ) = 0
perpendicular straight line 𝑎1 𝑥 + 𝑏1 𝑦 + 𝑐1 = 0 and 𝑦 = ± 𝑎 𝑥 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 ± 𝑏 = 0
𝑏 𝑥 𝑦
then the normals at these points are
𝑏1 𝑥 − 𝑎1 𝑦 + 𝑐2 = 0 in such a way that
concurrent. 𝟐 𝟐 a. When 𝑏 = 𝑎, 𝑖. 𝑒., the asymptote of rectangular
xviii. If the normal at four points 𝑎 𝑥+𝑏1𝑦+𝑐1
( 1 )
(𝑏 𝑥−𝑎1𝑦+𝑐2)
( 1 )
hyperbola 𝑥 2 − 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 are 𝑦 = ±𝑥 which are at
𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ), 𝑄(𝑥2 , 𝑦2 ), 𝑅(𝑥3 , 𝑦3 ) and 𝑆(𝑥4 , 𝑦4 ) on 2+𝑏2
√𝑎1 1
2+𝑏2
√𝑎1 1 right angle
𝑥2 𝑦2 − =𝟏 b. A hyperbola and conjugate hyperbola have the
𝒂𝟐 𝒃𝟐
the ellipse + = 1 are concurrent , then same asymptotes.
𝑎2 𝑏2 vi. Parametric Equation :-parametric equation of the
1 1 1 1 𝑥2 𝑦2
(𝑥1 + 𝑥2 + 𝑥3 + 𝑥4 ) ( + + + )= 4 hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 are c. The equation of the pair of asymptote differ the
𝑥1 𝑥2 𝑥3 𝑥4
hyperbola and the conjugate hyperbola by the
𝑏2 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑏 𝑠𝑖nℎ 𝜃
xix. Diameter and conjugate diameter :-𝑦 = − 2 𝑥 same constant only i.e.,
𝑎 𝑚 𝑒 𝜃 +𝑒 −𝜃 𝑒 𝜃 −𝑒 −𝜃
xx. Properties of conjugate diameters :- 𝑥 = 𝑎 ( 2 ), 𝑦 = 𝑏 ( 2 ) are also the parametric hyperbola-Asymptotes=Asymptotes-conjugate hyperbola
equations of the hyperbola d. The asymptotes pass through the centre of the
xxi. The eccentric angle of the ends of a pair of conjugate
vii. Equation of chord equation of chord joining two points hyperbola.
diameter of an ellipse differ by a right angle .
𝑃(𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃1 , 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃1 ) 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑄(𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃2 , 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃2 ) on e. The bisector of angle between the asymptote is the
xxii. The sum of the squares of any two conjugate semi – coordinate axes.
𝑥2 𝒚𝟐
diameters of an ellipse is constant and equal to the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 𝑖𝑠 𝑦 − 𝑥2 𝑦2
f. The angle between the asymptotes of − 𝑏2 = 1 is
the sum of the squares of the semi- axis of the 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃2 −𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃1
𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = 𝒂 𝒔𝒆𝒄 𝜽 (𝑥 − 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃1 ) or 𝑎2
𝑏
ellipse i.e., 𝐶𝑃2 + 𝐶𝐷 2 = 𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 𝑥 𝜃 −𝜃
𝟐−𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃1
𝑦 𝜃1+𝜃2 𝜃 +θ
−1
2 𝑡𝑎𝑛 (𝑎) 𝑜𝑟 2 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑒 −1

xxiii. If 𝐶𝑃 , 𝐶𝑄 𝑎𝑟𝑒 two conjugate semi diameters of an 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( 1 2 2 ) − 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛 ( 2 ) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 ( 1 2 2 ) xxxi. Director circle :- 𝑥 2 + 𝑦 2 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 .
𝑎
𝑥2 𝑦2 viii. Equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from a 𝑥2 𝑦2
ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 and 𝑆 , 𝑆1 be two foci of an 𝑥𝑥1 𝑦𝑦 xxxii. Rectangular hyperbola: - in a hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 if
𝑎 𝑏 point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is = − 21 = 1.
ellipse , then 𝑆𝑃 × 𝑆1 𝑃 = 𝐶𝑄 2 2 𝑎 𝑏
𝑥2 𝑦2
𝑏 = 𝑎 then it said to be rectangular hyperbola. the
xxiv. The tangent at the ends of a pair of conjugate ix. The equation of the chord of the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 eccentricity of a rectangular hyperbola is always
diameter of an ellipse form a parallelogram. bisected at point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is given by 𝑇 = 𝑆1 √2.
xxv. The area of the parallelogram formed by the x. Equation of tangent hyperbola :- Asymptote are 𝑥±𝑦 =0
tangents at the ends of conjugate diameters of xi. Point Form :- the equation of the tangent to the perpendicular lines
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥𝑥1 𝑦𝑦1
an ellipse is constant and is equal to the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 at (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) is − =1 i.e.,
𝑎2 𝑏2
product of the axis . xii. Parametric form :- at (𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 , 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃) is
𝑥
𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 − Eccentricity 𝑒 = √2
𝑎
xxvi. Important points :- 𝑦 Centre (0,0)
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = 1
𝑏
xxvii. The line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 touches the ellipse 2 + 2 = Foci (±√2𝑎, 0)
𝑎 𝑏 xiii. Slope form :- 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 ± √𝑎2 𝑚2 − 𝑏2 the coordinates of
1 𝑖𝑓 𝑐 2 = 𝑎2 𝑚2 + 𝑏 2 𝑎2𝑚 𝑏2 Vertices 𝐴(𝑎, 0)𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝐴1 (−𝑎, 0)
the point of contact are (± √𝑎2 , ± √𝑎2 ). 𝑎
xxviii. The combine equation of the pair of tangents drawn 𝑚 2−𝑏 2 𝑚 2−𝑏 2 Directrices 𝑥=±
𝑥2 𝑦2 xiv. the tangent at the point 𝑃(𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃1 , 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃1 ) and √2
from a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the ellipse 2 + 2 = 𝑄( 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 θ2 , 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃2 )intersect at the point
𝑎 𝑏
Latusrectum 2a
1 𝑖𝑠 𝑆𝑆1 = 𝑇 2 𝜃 −𝜃 𝜃 −𝜃
𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠( 1 2) 𝑏 𝑠𝑖𝑛( 1 2 )
[ 2
, 2
] Parametric form 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 , 𝑦 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃
xxix. The tangent and normal at any point of an ellipse 𝜃 +𝜃
𝑐𝑜𝑠( 1 2)
𝜃 +𝜃
𝑐𝑜𝑠( 1 2)
bisect the external and internal angles between
2 2 Equation of tangent 𝑥 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 −
xv. two tangents drawn from P are real and distinct , 𝑦 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑎
the focal radii the point . coincident or imaginary according as the roots of
Equation of normal
xxx. If SM and S’M are perpendicular from the foci upon the equation 𝑚2 (ℎ2 − 𝑎2 ) − 2𝑘ℎ𝑚 + 𝑘 2 + 𝑏2 = 0 𝑥 𝑦
+ 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 2𝑎
the tangent at any point of the ellipse, then are real and distinct coincident or imaginary . 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃

𝑆𝑀 × 𝑆 ′ 𝑀′ = 𝑏 2 and M , M’ lie on the auxiliary xvi. the line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 touches the hyperbola , if 𝑐 2 = xxxiii. Rectangular hyperbola of the form 𝑥 − 𝑦 = 𝑎2 2 2
𝑎 2𝑚 𝑏2 xxxiv. Rectangular hyperbola of the form 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑐 2
circle. 𝑎2 𝑚2 − 𝑏2 and the point of contacts (± , ± 𝑐 ),
𝑐
xxxi. The common chords of an ellipse and a circle are Asymptote are 𝑥 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 0
where 𝑐 = √𝑎2 𝑚2 − 𝑏2 .
equally inclined to the axes of the ellipse. perpendicular lines i.e.,
xvii. Maximum Two tangents can be drawn from a point to a
xxxii. The maximum four normals can be drawn from a Eccentricity 𝑒 = √2
hyperbola.
point on an ellipse . xviii. Normal equation of hyperbola :- Centre (0,0)
xxxiii. The pole of the line 𝑙𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 + 𝑛 = 0 with respect to 𝑎2𝑥 𝑏2 𝑦 Foci 𝑆(√2𝑐 , √2𝑐), 𝑆1 (−√2𝑐 , −√2𝑐)
xix. Point form :- + = 𝑎2 + 𝑏2 .
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑎2 𝑙 𝑏2 𝑚 𝑥1 𝑦1
Vertices 𝐴(𝑐, 𝑐), 𝐴1 (−𝑐, −𝑐)
ellipse + = 1 is 𝑃 (− ,− ) xx. Parametric form :- the equation of the normal at
𝑎2 𝑏2 𝑛 𝑛 𝐷𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒𝑠
𝑥2 𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥 + 𝑦 = ±√2𝑐
xxxiv. Locus of mid-point of focal chords of an ellipse + (𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃, 𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃) to the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 is 𝐿𝑎𝑡𝑢𝑠𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑚
𝑎2 2√2𝑐
𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑒𝑥 (𝑎𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 + 𝑏𝑦 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝜃) = 𝑎2 + b2 . Parametric form 𝑐
= 1 is 2 + 2 = 𝑚(𝑎 2+𝑏 2) 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑡 , 𝑦 =
𝑏2 𝑎 𝑏 a 𝑡
xxi. Slope form :- 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 ∓ √𝑎2 the coordinate of the
xxxv. Point of intersection of the tangents at two points −𝑏 2𝑚 2
xxxv. Tangent Equation of rectangular hyperbola 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑐 2
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑎2 𝑏 2𝑚 𝑥 𝑦
on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 whose eccentric point of contact are (± √𝑎2 , ∓ √𝑎2 ). 2
Point form :- 𝑥𝑦1 + 𝑦𝑥1 = 2𝑐 𝑜𝑟 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 2.
𝑎 𝑏 −𝑏 2 𝑚 2 −𝑏 2 𝑚 2 1 1
angles differ by a right angle lies on the ellipse xxii. The line 𝑦 = 𝑚𝑥 + 𝑐 will be normal to the hyperbola Parametric form :- the equation n of tangent at (𝑐𝑡 , 𝑡 ) to
𝑐
2
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑚 2 (𝑎 2+𝑏 2 )
+ 2 = 2. − 𝑏2 = 1 if 𝑐 2 = 𝑎2−𝑏2 𝑚2 the hyperbola is 𝑡 + 𝑦𝑡 = 2𝑐.
𝑥
𝑎2 𝑏 𝑎2
xxxvi. Eccentric angles of the extremities of latusrectum of xxiii. Maximum four normals can be drawn from a point 𝑐 𝑐
𝑥2 𝑦2
Tangent at 𝑃 (𝑐𝑡1 , 𝑡 ) and 𝑄 (𝑐𝑡2 , 𝑡 ) to the rectangular
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑏 (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1. 1 2
an ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 are 𝑡𝑎𝑛 −1 (± ). 2𝑐𝑡1𝑡2 2𝑐
𝑎 𝑏 𝑎𝑒 hyperbola intersect at ( 𝑡 ,𝑡 ).
xxxvii. The straight lines 𝑦 = 𝑚1 𝑥 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 𝑚2 𝑥 are xxiv. Co-normal point: - Points on the hyperbola, the normals 1+𝑡2 1 +𝑡2

𝑥2 𝑦2 at which passes through a given point are called co- The equation of the chord of contact of tangent drawn
conjugate diameters of an ellipse + = 1, if normal points. from a point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the rectangular hyperbola
𝑎2 𝑏2
𝑏2 a. The sum of the eccentric angles of the co-normal points is 𝑥𝑦1 + 𝑦𝑥1 = 2𝑐 2 .
𝑚1 𝑚2 = − 2 xxxvi. Normal equation of rectangular hyperbola 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑐 2
𝑎 is an odd multiple of 𝜋.
xxxviii. The normal at the point P on an ellipse with foci b. , 𝐼𝑓 𝜃1 𝜃2 , 𝜃3 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝜃4 are eccentric angles of four Point form: - the equitation of the normal at (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) to the
𝑆, 𝑆1 is the internal bisector of ∠𝑆𝑃𝑆1 . 𝑥2
points on the hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 then normal at
𝑦2 rectangular hyperbola is 𝑥x1 − 𝑦𝑦1 = 𝑥12 − 𝑦12 .
𝑐
46. Hyperbola Parametric form: - the equation of the normal at (𝑐𝑡 , ) to
which they are concurrent, then 𝑡
i. Transverse and conjugate Axes:- the line through the foci the rectangular hyperbola 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑐 2 is 𝑥𝑡 3 − 𝑦𝑡 −
∑ 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) = 0 , ∑ 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜃1 + 𝜃2 ) = 0
of the hyperbola is called its transverse axis .the 𝑐𝑡 4 + 𝑐 = 0.
line through the centre and perpendicular to the

Page 9
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
𝑐
The equation of the normal at (𝑐𝑡 , 𝑡 ) is a fourth degree xi. If A and b are two events , then 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) ≤ 𝑃(𝐴) ≤ Application based on Result
equation in t. so in general maximum four normals 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) ≤ 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐴) When two dice are thrown, the number of ways of getting a
can be drawn from a point to the hyperbola 𝑥𝑦 = xii. If A and B are two events associate with a random total r is
𝑐 2. experiments , then (𝑟 − 1), 𝑖𝑓 2 ≤ 𝑟 ≤ 7 And (13 − 𝑟), 𝑖𝑓 8 ≤ 𝑟 ≤ 12
xxxvii. Important point to be Remembered a. 𝑃(𝐴̅ ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐵) − 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) (ii)𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵̅) = Experiment with insertion of n letters in n addressed
xxxviii. The point (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) lies outside , on or inside the 𝑃(𝐴) − 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) envelopes.
𝑥2 𝑦2 𝑥2 𝑦2 b. 𝑃[(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵̅ ) ∪ (𝐴̅ ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐵) − 2𝑃(𝐴 ∩ xxii. Probability of inserting all the n letters in right
hyperbola 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 according as 𝑎12 − 𝑏12 − 1 < , = 𝐵)(ii)𝑃(𝐴̅ ∩ 𝐵̅) = 1 − 𝑃(A ∪ 𝐵) 1
envelopes = 𝑛!
𝑜𝑟 > 0 c. 𝑃(𝐴̅ ∪ 𝐵̅) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) (ii)𝑃(𝐴) = 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + xxiii. Probability that all letters does not in right envelopes
xxxix. The combine equation of the pair of tangents drawn 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵̅) 1
from a point 𝑃(𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) lying outside the hyperbola = 1 − 𝑛!
d. 𝑃(𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + 𝑃(𝐵 ∩ 𝐴̅)
𝑥2 𝑦2 xxiv. Probability of keeping all the letters in wrong envelope
𝑆 = 𝑎2 − 𝑏2 = 1 𝑖𝑠 𝑆𝑆1 − 𝑇 2 . xiii. P (exactly on e of A , B occurs)= 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐵) −
1 1 (−1) 𝑛
xl. The equation (𝑥1 , 𝑦1 ) the chord of the hyperbola 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑐 2 2𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) − 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 2! − 3! + … . . + 𝑛!
whose mid point is 𝑇 = 𝑆1 or 𝑥𝑦1 + 𝑦𝑥1 = 2𝑥1 𝑦1 P (neither A nor B)= 𝑃(𝐴′ ∩ 𝐵̅) = 𝟏 − 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) xxv. Probability that exactly r letters are right envelopes =
xli. Equation of the chord joining 𝑡1 , 𝑡2 on 𝑥𝑦 = 𝑡 2is 𝑥 + xiv. If A , B and C are three events, then p (exactly one of 1 1 1 1
[ − + − … . +(−1)𝑛−𝑟 (𝑛−𝑟)!]
1

𝑦𝑡1 𝑡2 = 𝑐(𝑡1 + 𝑡2 ) A, B ,C occur 𝑟! 2! 3! 4!

= 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐵) + 𝑃(𝐶) − 2𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) − 2𝑃(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) − xxvi. Selection of shoes from a Cupboard Out of n pair of
xlii. Eccentricity of the rectangular hyperbola is √2 and the shoes, if k shoes are selected at random, the
2𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐶) + 3𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶)
angle between asymptote is 900 . 𝑛 𝐶 2𝑘
P( at least two of A , B , C occurs ) = 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + 𝑃(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) + probability that there is no pair is 𝑝= 𝑘
xliii. If a triangle is inscribed in a rectangular hyperbola, then 2𝑛 𝐶
𝑘
𝑃(𝐶 ∩ 𝐴) − 2𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶)
its orthocenter lies on the hyperbola. xxvii. The probability that there is at least one pair is
P( exactly two of A , B ,C occurs ) = 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + 𝑃(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) +
xliv. Any straight line parallel to an asymptote of a hyperbola (1 − 𝑝).
𝑃(𝐶 ∩ 𝐴) − 3𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶)
intersects the hyperbola at only one point. Selection of squares from the chessboard If r squares are
xv. 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐵), if A and B are mutually
selected from a chessboard, then probability that they
exclusive events . {4[ 7 𝐶𝑟 +6 𝐶𝑟 + ….+ 1 𝐶𝑟 ]+2( 8 𝐶𝑟 )}
Probability
xvi. 𝑃(𝐴̅) = 1 − 𝑃(𝐴) lie on a diagonal is 64 𝐶
𝑟

Some basic terms xvii. 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐴̅) = 𝑃(𝑆) = 1, 𝑃(∅) = 0 xxviii. If A and B finite sets and if a mapping is selected at
Coin: - A coin has two sides, head and tail. If an event consists of xviii. 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴) × 𝑃(𝐵), 𝑖𝑓 A and B are independent random from the set of all mapping from A into B ,
more than one coin, then coins are considered as distinct, if not events. then the probability that the mapping is
otherwise stated. xix. 𝑖𝑓 A and B are independent events associate with a 𝑛(𝐵) 𝑃
𝑛(𝐴)
random experiment , then 𝑎 𝑜𝑛𝑒 − 𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑓𝑢𝑛𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝒏(𝑩)𝑛(𝐴)
Die: - A die has six face marked 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 , if we have
̅
𝐴 And B are independent events . 𝑛(𝐵) 𝑃
𝑛(𝐴)
more than one dice, then all dice are considered as distinct , if not xxix. a many one-function = 1 −
otherwise stated . A and 𝐵̅ are independent events . 𝒏(𝐵)𝑛(𝐴)
𝑛(𝐵)
Playing cards:- A pack of playing cards has 52 cards . there are 4 𝐴̅ and 𝐵̅ are independent events . xxx. a constant function =𝑛(𝐵)𝑛(𝐴)
suit ( spade , heart , diamond and club) each having 13 cards . xx. If 𝐴1 , 𝐴2 … . . , 𝐴𝑛 are independent events associate with 𝑛(𝐴)!
xxxi. a one-one function = 𝑛(𝐵)𝑛(𝐴)
there are two colors, red ( heart and diamond ) and black(spade a random experiments , then probability of
and club) each having 26 cards. occurrence of at least one = 𝑃(𝐴1 ∪ 𝐴2 ∪ … . .∪ 𝐴𝑛 ) =
1 − 𝑃(𝐴 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
1 ∪ 𝐴2 ∪ … 𝐴𝑛 )
Differentiation:-
In 13 cards of each suit, there are 3 face cards namely king ,
queen and jack so there are in all 12 face cards. Also , there are 16 = 1 − 𝑃(𝐴̅1 )𝑃(𝐴̅2 ) … … 𝑃(𝐴̅𝑛 )
xxi. If 𝐵 ⊆ 𝐴, then 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵̅ = 𝑃(𝐴) − 𝑃(𝐵) Standard Differentiations:-
honour cards . 4 of each suit namely ace , king , queen and jack. 𝑑 𝑑
Types of Experiments Conditional probability 1. 𝑑𝑥 = (𝑥 𝑛 ) = 𝑛𝑥 𝑛−1 , 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅 (a)𝑑𝑥 (𝑘) =
Let A and B be two events associative with a random 𝑑
1. Deterministic Experiment Those experiments, which 0, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑘 𝑖𝑠 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 . (b)𝑑𝑥 (𝑒 𝑥 ) = 𝑒 𝑥
when repeated under identical conditions produce the experiments then, the probability of occurrence of 𝑑
event A under the condition that. B has already 2. (𝑎 𝑥 ) = 𝑎 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑒 𝑎 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 > 0, 𝑎 ≠ 1
same result or outcome are known as deterministic 𝑑𝑥
𝑑 1
Experiment occurred and 𝑃(𝐵) ≠ 0 is called the conditional (c)𝑑𝑥 (𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑒 𝑥) = 𝑥 , 𝑥 > 0
2. Probabilistic /Random Experiment probability. 𝑑 1 𝑑
𝑃(𝐴∩𝐵) 3. (𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑎 𝑥) = 𝑥 (𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑎 𝑒) (d)𝑑𝑥 (𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 ) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥
Those experiments, which when repeated under identical i.e., 𝑃(𝐴/𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐵) 𝑑𝑥
𝑑
conditions , do not produce the same result or outcome (e)𝑑𝑥 (𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 ) = − 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥
if A has already occurred and 𝑃(𝐴) ≠ 0, then 𝑃(𝐵/𝐴) = 𝑑 𝜋
every time but the outcome in a trail is one of the 𝑃(𝐴∩𝐵) 𝐴 𝐴̅ 4. (𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 ) = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝑥 , 𝑥 ≠ (2𝑛 + 1) 2 , 𝑛𝜖𝐼
several possible outcome, are called random Also, 𝑃 (𝐵 ) + (𝐵 ) = 1 𝑑𝑥
𝑃(𝐴) 𝑑
experiment. Multiple theorem on probability 5. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥) = −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝑥 , 𝑥 ≠ 𝑛𝜋, 𝑛𝜖𝐼
𝑑
47. Probability If A and B are two events associated with a random 6. (𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 ) = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 , 𝑥 ≠ (2𝑛 + 1) 𝜋 /2, 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼
𝑑𝑥
If there are n elementary events associated with a experiment, then𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴)𝑃(𝐵/𝐴), if 𝑃(𝐴) ≠ 0, 𝑑
𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐵)𝑃(𝐴/𝐵), if 𝑃(𝐵) ≠ 0 7. (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥) = −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 , 𝑥 ≠ 𝑛𝜋 , 𝑛𝜖𝐼
random experiment and m of them are favorable to an 𝑑𝑥
𝑑 1
event A. then the probability of happening or Total Probability 8. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑠𝑖𝑛−1 𝑥) = √1−𝑥 2 , −1 < 𝑥 < 1
occurrence of A, denoted by P(A), is given by Let S be the sample space and let 𝐸1 , 𝐸2 , 𝐸3 … . 𝐸𝑛 be n 𝑑 1
𝑚 𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑣𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑠 mutually exclusive and exhaustive events associated 9. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑐𝑜𝑠 −1
𝑥) = − √1−𝑥 2 , −1 < 𝑥 < 1
P(A)= = 𝑑 1 𝑑 1
𝑛 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑠 with a random experiment. If A is any event which 10. (𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 𝑥) = 1+𝑥 2 (b)𝑑𝑥 (𝑐𝑜𝑡 −1 𝑥) = − 1+𝑥 2
Types of events occurs with 𝐸1 𝑜𝑟 𝐸2 𝑜𝑟 … 𝑜𝑟 𝐸𝑛 , then 𝑃(𝐴) = 𝑑𝑥
𝑑 1
a) Equally likely Events The given events are said to be 𝐴 𝐴 11. (𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 𝑥) = , |𝑥| > 1
𝑃(𝐸1 )𝑃 (𝐸 ) + 𝑃(𝐸2 )𝑃 (𝐸 ) + . +𝑃(𝐸𝑛 )𝑃(𝐴/𝐸𝑛 ) = 𝑑𝑥 |𝑥|√𝑥 2−1
equally likely. If none of them is expected to occur in 1 2 𝑑 1
∑𝑛𝑟=1 𝑃(𝐸𝑟 )𝑃(𝐴/𝐸𝑟 ) 12. (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 𝑥 ) = − , |𝑥| > 1
preference to the other 𝑑𝑥 |𝑥|√𝑥 2−1
𝑑 𝑑
b) Mutually Exclusive Events A set of events is said to be 𝑩𝒂𝒚𝒆’𝒔 Theorem 13. (𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ𝑥) = 𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ 𝑥 (b)𝑑𝑥 (𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ 𝑥) = − 𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ 𝑥
𝑑𝑥
mutually exclusive , if the happening of one excludes Let S be the sample space and let 𝐸1 , 𝐸2 , … . 𝐸𝑛 be n 𝑑
the happening of the other mutually exclusive and exhaustive events associated 14. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑐𝑜𝑡ℎ 𝑥) = −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 (ℎ𝑥)
𝑑
If A and B are mutually exclusive, then 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)=0 with a random experiment. If A is any event which 15. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ 𝑥 ) = − 𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ 𝑥 𝑡𝑎𝑛ℎ 𝑥
c) Exhaustive events A set of events is said to be occurs with 𝐸1 𝑜𝑟 𝐸2 𝑜𝑟 … . . 𝑜𝑟 𝐸𝑛 , then probability of 𝑑
occurrence of 𝐸𝑖 , when A occurred,
16. (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ 𝑥 ) = −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑡 ℎ𝑥
exhaustive, if the performance of the experiment 𝑑𝑥
𝑑 1
always results in the occurrence of at least one of P(𝐸𝑖 )𝑃(
𝐴
𝐸𝑖
) 17. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑠𝑖𝑛ℎ−1 𝑥) = √1+𝑥 2 : ∀ 𝑥 ∈ 𝑅
them. 𝑃(𝐸𝑖 /𝐴 ) = ∑𝑛
, 𝑖 = 1, 2 , … . , 𝑛 𝑑 1
𝑖=1 𝑃(𝐸𝑖 )𝑃(𝐴/𝐸𝑖 ) 18. (𝑐𝑜𝑠ℎ−1 𝑥) = √𝑥 2 :|𝑥| > 1
If 𝐸1 , 𝐸2 , … . , 𝐸𝑛 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑒𝑥ℎ𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑠 , 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 Where, 𝑃(𝐸𝑖 ), 1,2, … , 𝑛 are known as the prior probabilities 𝑑𝑥 −1
𝑑 1
𝐸1 ∪ 𝐸2 ∪ … .∪ 𝐸𝑛 = 𝑆 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑃(𝐸1 ∪ 𝐸2 ∪ 𝐸3 ∪ … 𝐸𝑛 ) = 1 𝐴
𝑃 (𝐸 ) , 𝑖 = 1,2,3, … , 𝑛 are called the likelihood probabilities 19. 𝑑𝑥
(𝑡𝑎𝑛ℎ−1 𝑥 ) = 1−x2 :|𝑥| < 1
d) Independent Events Two events A and B associated to 𝑖 𝑑 1
𝐸 20. (𝑐𝑜𝑡ℎ−1 𝑥) = 1−𝑥 2 : |𝑥| > 1
a random experiment are independent, if the 𝑃 ( 𝐴𝑖 ), i= 1,2,3….,n are called the posterior probabilities 𝑑𝑥
𝑑 1
probability of occurrence or non occurrence of A is not Probability Distribution
21. (𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ−1 𝑥) = − : |𝑥| < 1
𝑑𝑥 𝑥√1−𝑥 2
affect by the occurrence or non occurrence of B. If a random variable X takes values 𝑋1 , 𝑋2 , … . . , 𝑋𝑛 with 𝑑 1
(b)𝑑𝑥 (𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐ℎ−1 𝑥) = − :𝑥
i.e., 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴)𝑃(𝐵) respective probabilities 𝑃1 , 𝑃2 , . . 𝑃𝑛 , then |𝑥|√1+𝑥 2
Complement an event Fundamental Rules for Differentiation
𝑋 𝑋1 𝑋2 𝑋3 … …. 𝑋𝑛
Let A be an event in a sample space S, the complement of A 𝑃(𝑋) 𝑃1 𝑃2 𝑃3 … … 𝑃𝑛 22. 𝑑 {𝑐𝑓(𝑥)} = 𝑐 𝑑 𝑓(𝑥). 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑐 𝑖𝑠 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥
is the set of all sample points of the space other than Is known as the probability distribution of X. 𝑑 𝑑 d
the sample point in A and it is denoted by ,
23. {𝑓(𝑥) ± 𝑔(𝑥)} = 𝑓(𝑥) ± 𝑔(𝑥),
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥 dx
Important Result
A’ or 𝐴̅ = {𝑛: 𝑛 ∈ 𝑆, 𝑛 ∉ 𝐴} 𝟐 ( 𝑠𝑢𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟𝑢l𝑒 )
Variance:- 𝑽(𝑿) = 𝝈𝟐𝟏 = 𝑬(𝑿𝟐 ) − (𝑬(𝑿)) 𝒘𝒉𝒆𝒓𝒆 , 𝑬(𝑿𝟐 ) = 𝑑
24. 𝑑𝑥
𝑑
 P(𝐴 ∪ 𝐴′ ) = 𝑆 𝒏 𝟐
{𝑓(𝑥)𝑔(𝑥)} = 𝑓(𝑥) 𝑑𝑥 𝑔(𝑥) +
∑𝒊=𝟏 𝒙𝒊 𝑷(𝒙𝒊 )
 P(A∩ 𝐴′) = ∅ 𝑑
𝑔(𝑥) 𝑑𝑥 𝑓(𝑥) (𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑟𝑢𝑙𝑒 )
 P(A’)’=A Standard deviation:- √𝑉(𝑋) = 𝝈𝒙 = √𝑬(𝑿𝟐 ) − (𝑬(𝑿))
𝟐
𝑑 𝑑
𝑑 𝑓(𝑥) {𝑔(𝑥) 𝑓(𝑥)− 𝑓(𝑥) 𝑔(𝑥)}
Important result on Probability:- 25. [ ] = 𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥
quotient rule
i. If a set of events 𝐴1 , 𝐴2 , … . 𝐴𝑛 are mutually exclusive, 𝐼𝑓 𝑌 = 𝑎 𝑋 + 𝑏, then 𝐸(𝑌) = 𝐸(𝑎𝑋 + 𝐵) = 𝑎𝐸(𝑋) + 𝑏 𝑑𝑥 𝑔(𝑥) 𝑔(𝑥)2

then 𝐴1 ∩ 𝐴2 ∩ 𝐴3∩ … . .∩ 𝐴𝑛 = ∅ 𝜎𝑦2 = 𝑉(𝑦) = 𝑎2 𝑉(𝑋) = 𝑎2 𝜎𝑥2 , 𝜎𝑦 = √𝑉(𝑌) = |𝑎|𝜎𝑥

∴ 𝑃(𝐴1 ∪ 𝐴2 ∪ … .∪ 𝐴𝑛 ) = 𝑃(𝐴1 ) + (𝐴2 ) + … . +𝑃(𝐴𝑛 )And If 𝑍 = 𝑎𝑋 2 + 𝑏𝑋 + 𝑐, then 𝐸(𝑍) = 𝐸(𝑎𝑋 2 + 𝐵𝑋 + 𝑐), = S Function Substitution
𝑃(𝐴1 ∩ 𝐴2 ∩ 𝐴3 ∩ … . .∩ 𝐴𝑛 ) = 0 𝑎𝐸(𝑋 2 ) + 𝑏𝐸(𝑋) + 𝑐
ii. If a set of event 𝐴1 , 𝐴2 , … . . , 𝐴𝑛 are exhaustive, then Binomial distribution
1 √𝑎2 − 𝑥 2 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
𝑃(𝐴1 ∪ 𝐴2 ∪ … … ∪ 𝐴𝑛 ) = 1 Bernaulli trail :- In a random experiment , if there are any
iii. Probability of an impossible event is 0. i.e., 𝑃(𝐴) = 0 two events , “success and failure “ and the sum of the 2 √𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 𝑐o𝑡 𝜃
iv. Probability of any event in a sample space is 1. 𝑃(𝐴) = probabilities of these two events is 1 , then any
1 outcome of such experiment is known as a bernaulli 3 √𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝜃
v. Odds in favour of 𝐴 = 𝑃(𝐴̅)
𝑃(𝐴) trail .
Binomial distribution: - The probability of r success in n 4
vi. Odds in against of 𝐴 = 𝑃(𝐴)
𝑃(𝐴̅)
independent bernaulli trails is denoted by 𝑃(𝑋 = 𝑟) √𝑎 + 𝑥 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √𝑎 −𝑥 𝑥= 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2𝜃
and is given by 𝑃(𝑋 = 𝑟) = 𝑛 𝐶𝑟 𝑝𝑟 𝑞 𝑛−𝑟 , 5 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 𝑎 = 𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝛼 , 𝑏 = 𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝛼
vii. Addition theorem of probability
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 p = probability of success 𝑞 = + 𝑏 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥
viii. For two events A and B 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) = 𝑃(𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐵) −
𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑏𝑎𝑏𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑓𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑝 + 𝑞 = 1 2 2
6 √𝑥 − 𝛼 𝑎𝑛𝑑 √𝛽 −𝑥 𝑥= 𝛼 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 + 𝛽 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
ix. For three events A , B and c 𝑃(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵 ∪ 𝐶) = Geometrical probability
𝑃(𝐴) + P(𝐵) + 𝑃(𝐶) − 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) − 𝑃(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) − If the total of outcomes of a trial in a random experiment is
𝑃(𝐶 ∩ 𝐴) + 𝑃(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) infinite, in such cases, the definition of probability is 7 √2𝑎𝑥 − 𝑥 2 𝑥 = 𝑎 (1 − 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃)
x. Booley’s inequality modified of an event is general experiment for the 𝑑 𝑑
If 𝐴1 , 𝐴2 , … . , 𝐴𝑛 are n events associated with a random probability p of occurrence of an event is given by 26. 𝑑𝑥
𝑓(𝑥) = ∅ (𝑥), 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑑𝑥 𝑓(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏 ) = 𝑎 ∅ (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)
𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
experiment, then 𝑷(𝑨𝟏 ∩ 𝐴2 ∩ … ∩ 𝐴𝑛 ) ≥ ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑃(𝐴𝑖 ) − 𝑃= 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 wℎ𝑜𝑙𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑖𝑜𝑛
(𝑛 − 1) Where measure means length or area or volume of the INTEGRATION
𝑃(⋃𝑛𝑖=1 𝐴𝑖 ) ≤ ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑃(𝐴𝑖 ) region , if we are dealing with one , two or three
Indefinite integration:-
dimensional space respectively.

Page 10
 MaaRula MCA Entrance Classes Amit Katiyar(JNU-MCA)
Let f(x) be a function . then , the collection of all its primitives Standard Substitutions Position vector of different centre of a triangle
is called the indefinite integral of f(x) and is denoted by Definite integral i. If a, b, and c be PV’s of the vertices A, B C of a ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶
∫ 𝑓(𝑥) 𝑑𝑥. Integration as inverse operation of respectively , then the PV of centroid G of the
𝑑 Lets f(x) be function definite on the interval [a,b] and F(x) be
differentiation. If 𝑑𝑥 {∅(𝑥)} = 𝑓(𝑥), then ∫ 𝑓(𝑥) + 𝑐, ⃗ +𝑐
𝑎⃗ +𝑏
𝑏 triangle is
where c is called the constant of integration or arbitrary its anti-derivative. Then,ss∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = 𝐹(𝑏) − 𝐹(𝑎) 3
⃗ +(𝐴𝐵)𝑐
(𝐵𝐶)𝑎⃗+(𝐶𝐴)𝑏
constant. The above is called the second fundamental theorem of ii. The PV of 𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 of ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 is
𝐵𝐶+𝐶𝐴+𝐴𝐵
∫(𝑥) → 𝐼𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑛d calculus.
𝑏 iii. The PV of orthocenter of ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 is
𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 → 𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 is definite integral of f(x) from 𝑥 = 𝑎 to 𝑥 = 𝑏. The ⃗ (𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐵)+𝑐(𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐶)
𝑎⃗ (𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐴)+𝑏
∫ → 𝑆𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑙 numbers a and b are called limits of integration. (𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐴+𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐵+𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝐶)
∅(𝑥) Anti-derivative or primitive or integral of function f(x) Properties of definite integral Scalar product of two vectors
the process of finding function whose derivative is given, 𝑏 𝑏 𝑏 𝑎
̂. 𝒌
̂ =1
i. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑡)𝑑𝑡 (a)∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = − ∫𝑏 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 (i)𝒊̂. 𝒊̂ = 𝒋̂. 𝒋̂ = 𝒌 (𝑖𝑖)𝑖̂. 𝑗̂ = 𝑗̂. 𝑘̂ = 𝑘̂ . 𝑖̂ = 0
is called anti-differentiation of integration. 𝑏 𝑐 𝑏
𝑥 𝑛+1 1 ii. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 + ∫𝑐 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑎 < 𝑐 < 𝑏 (𝑖𝑖𝑖)The scalar product of vectors is distributive unit
i. ∫ 𝑥 𝑛 𝑑𝑥 = + 𝑐 , 𝑛 ≠ −1(b)∫ 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑒 |𝑥| + 𝑐 𝑎 ̂ , then
𝑛+1 𝑥 iii. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = 0 vectors 𝒊̂ , 𝒋̂, and 𝒌
𝑎𝑥
ii. ∫ 𝑒 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑒 + 𝑐 (b)∫ 𝑎 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔
𝑥
+𝑐 𝑎 𝑎
a. 𝑎 . (𝑏⃗ + 𝑐 ) = 𝑎 . 𝑏⃗ + 𝑎. 𝑐 (𝑙𝑒𝑓𝑡 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒)
𝑒𝑎 iv. ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑓(𝑎 − 𝑥)𝑑𝑥 deduction
iii. ∫ 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 + 𝑐 (c)∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 + 𝑐 𝑎
∫0
𝑓(𝑥)
𝑑𝑥 = 2
𝑎 b. (𝑏⃗ + 𝑐 ). 𝑎 = 𝑏⃗ . 𝑎 + 𝑐 . 𝑎 (𝑟𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒)
iv. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑡a𝑛 𝑥 + 𝑐 (b)∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 + 𝑐 𝑓(𝑥)+𝑓(𝑎−𝑥)
Note:- length of a vector as a scalar product
𝑏 𝑏
v. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 + 𝑐 v. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑎 + 𝑏 − 𝑥)𝑑𝑥 deduction
If a be any vectors, then the scalar product
vi. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = −𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 + 𝑐 𝑏 𝑓(𝑥)
𝑑𝑥 =
𝑏−𝑎
∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)+𝑓(𝑎+𝑏−𝑥) 2 𝑎. 𝑎 = |𝑎||𝑎 | 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 ⇒ |𝑎 |2 = 𝑎 2 ⇒ 𝑎 = |𝑎|
vii. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥| + 𝑐
Condition of perpendicularity 𝑎 . 𝑏⃗ = 0 ⇔
2𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
viii. ∫ 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = −𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 | + 𝑐 vi. ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 + ∫0 𝑓(2𝑎 − 𝑥)𝑑𝑥
𝑎 𝑎 𝑎
ix. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 + 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 | + 𝑐(b)∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = vii. ∫−𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 + ∫0 𝑓(−𝑥)𝑑𝑥 𝑎 𝑖𝑠 perpendicular to 𝑏⃗ , 𝑎 and 𝑏⃗ being non.zero
𝑎
𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 − 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 | + 𝑐 2𝑎 2 ∫ 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 𝑖𝑓 , 𝑓(2𝑎 − 𝑥) = 𝑓(𝑥) Important points to be remembered
x.
1 𝑥 1 𝑥
∫ √𝑎2 2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛−1 𝑎 + 𝑐 (b)∫ − √𝑎2 2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠 −1 𝑎 + 𝑐 viii. ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = { 0 2
−𝑥 −𝑥 0 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑓(2𝑎 − 𝑥) = −𝑓(𝑥) i. (𝑎 + 𝑏⃗). (𝑎 − 𝑏⃗) = |𝑎|2 − |𝑏⃗|
2 2
xi.
1
∫ 𝑎 2+𝑥 2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 𝑎 + 𝑐
1 𝑥
𝑏
0 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑓(𝑎 + 𝑥) = −𝑓(𝑏 − 𝑥) ii. |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗ | = |𝑎|2 + |𝑏⃗| + 2(𝑎. 𝑏⃗)
1 1 𝑥
ix. ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = { 𝑎+𝑏 2 2
xii. ∫ − 𝑎2 +𝑥 2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑡 −1 𝑎 +𝑐 2 ∫𝑎 2 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑓(𝑎 + 𝑥) = 𝑓(𝑏 − 𝑥) iii. |𝑎 − 𝑏⃗ | = |𝑎|2 + |𝑏⃗| − 2(𝑎. 𝑏⃗)
1 1 𝑎 2 2 2 2
−1 𝑥 x. ∫−𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 =
xiii. ∫
𝑥√𝑥 2−𝑎 2
𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑎
+𝑐 iv. |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗ | + |𝑎 − 𝑏⃗| = 2(|𝑎|2 + |𝑏⃗| ) and |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗| −
𝑎 2
1 1 𝑥 2 ∫ 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑖𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)𝑖𝑠 𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑛 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑓(−𝑥) = 𝑓(𝑥) |𝑎 − 𝑏⃗ | = 4(𝑎. 𝑏⃗)
xiv. ∫− 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 −1 𝑎 + 𝑐 { 0
𝑥√𝑥 2−𝑎 2
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑓(𝑥)𝑖𝑠 𝑜𝑑𝑑 𝑖. 𝑒. , 𝑓(−𝑥) = −𝑓(𝑥) v. 𝑖𝑓 |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗| = |𝑎| + |𝑏⃗|, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑎 𝑖𝑠 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑙 𝑡𝑜 𝑏⃗.
Comparison between Differentiation and integration 𝑏 1
xi. 𝑖𝑓 ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = (𝑏 − 𝑎) ∫0 𝑓[(𝑏 − 𝑎)𝑥 + 𝑎]𝑑𝑥
xv. Both differentiation and integration are linear operator by vi. If |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗| = |𝑎 − 𝑏⃗|, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑎 𝑖𝑠 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑡𝑜 𝑏⃗.
functions as xii. If 𝑓(𝑥) is periodic function with period T, [ i.e., vii. Angle between two vectors :- if 𝜃 is angle between two
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 𝑎+𝑇
{𝑎𝑓(𝑥) ± 𝑏𝑔(𝑥)} = 𝑎 {𝑓(𝑥)} ± 𝑏 {𝑔(𝑥)} and ∫[ 𝑎. 𝑓(𝑥) ± 𝑓(𝑥 + 𝑇) = 𝑓(𝑥)] then , ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 is independent of a. ⃗
𝑎⃗ .𝑏
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥
𝑛𝑇 𝑇 non-zero vectors , 𝑎, 𝑏⃗ , then we have 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 = ⃗|
𝑏. 𝑔(𝑥)]𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 ∫ 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 ± 𝑏 ∫ 𝑔(𝑥)𝑑𝑥. a. ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑛 ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 |𝑎⃗ ||𝑏
xvi. All function are not differentiable, similarly there are some 𝑎+𝑛𝑇 𝑇 viii. Projection and component of a vectors :-
function which are not inferable. b. ∫𝑎+𝑚𝑇 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = (𝑛 − 𝑚) ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑚, 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 ⃗
𝑎⃗ .𝑏 ⃗
𝑎⃗ .𝑏
𝑏+𝑚𝑇 𝑏 Projection of 𝑎 on 𝑏⃗ = , Projection of 𝑏⃗ on 𝑎 =
xvii. Integral of a function is always discussed in an interval but c. ∫𝑎+𝑚𝑇 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫𝑎 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑛 ∈ 𝐼 , a, b ∈ R ⃗|
|𝑏 |𝑎⃗ |
derivative of a function can be discussed in a interval as well ⃗
𝑎⃗ .𝑏
𝑎+𝑛𝑇 𝑎
d. ∫𝑛𝑇 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑓(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 , 𝑛 ∈ 𝑍, 𝑎 ∈ 𝑅 Vector component of a vector 𝑎 on 𝑏⃗ = 2 . 𝑏⃗
as on a point ⃗|
|𝑏
Basic formula using method of substitution Gamma function ⃗
𝑎⃗ .𝑏
1 Vector component of 𝑏⃗ on 𝑎 = |𝑎⃗|2 𝑎
i. ∫ f(𝑥)𝑑𝑥 = ∅(𝑥), 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 ∫ 𝑓(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 ∅(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + c. If n is a positive rational number then the improper integral
∞
1 1 ∫0 𝑒 −𝑥 𝑥 𝑛−1` 𝑑𝑥 = 𝛤(𝑛) ix. Work done by a force 𝑤 = 𝑓. 𝑑
ii. ∫ 𝑎𝑥+𝑏 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏| + 𝑐 𝜋 𝑚+1 𝑛+1 Vector or cross Product of two vectors
𝛤( )𝛤( )
iii. ∫(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑛 dx = 𝑎 .
1 (𝑎𝑥+𝑏)𝑛+1
+ 𝑐 , 𝑛 ≠ −1 ∫02 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑚 𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 2
𝑚+𝑛+2
2
The vector product of the vector 𝑎 and 𝑏⃗ is denoted by 𝑎 × 𝑏⃗
2𝛤( )
𝑛+1 2
1 1 and it is defined as
iv. ∫ 𝑒 𝑎𝑥+𝑏 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑒 𝑎𝑥+𝑏 + 𝑐 i. 𝛤(𝑛 + 1) = 𝑛𝛤𝑛 = 𝑛! ii. 𝛤1 = 1 iii.𝛤 2 = √𝜋 𝑖𝑣. 𝛤0 = ∞
𝑎 𝑎𝑥+𝑏
𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ = |𝑎||𝑏⃗| 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑎 ||𝑏⃗ 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
v. ∫𝑎 𝑎𝑥+𝑏
𝑑𝑥 = + 𝑐, 𝑎 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑎 ≠ 1 Important result
𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑎 𝜋
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑛 𝑥 𝜋
𝜋
𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑛 𝑥
Important Points to be 𝑹𝒆𝒎𝒆𝒎𝒃𝒆𝒓𝒆𝒅
1 i. ∫0
2 𝑑𝑥 = = ∫ 2 𝑑𝑥 i. Let 𝑎 = a1 𝑖̂ + 𝑎2 𝑗̂ + 𝑎3 𝑘̂ 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑏⃗ = 𝑏1 𝑖̂ + 𝑏2 𝑗̂ + 𝑏3 𝑘̂
vi. ∫ 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑐(b)∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑥 + 𝜋
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑛 𝑥 4
𝜋
0 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑛 𝑥
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥
1
𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑐 ii. ∫0
2
𝜋 𝑑𝑥
𝑑𝑥 = 4 = ∫02 1+𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥 𝑖̂ 𝑗̂ 𝑘̂
1+𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥
1
𝜋
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥 π
𝜋
𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛 𝑥
Then 𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ = |𝑎1 𝑎2 𝑎3 |
vii. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐 2(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑐 iii. ∫0 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 4 = ∫02 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥
2
𝑏1 𝑏2 𝑏3
1 𝜋 𝜋 𝑛
viii. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 2 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑡(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑐 iv.
𝑑𝑥 𝜋 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 𝑑𝑥
∫02 1+𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛 𝑥 = 4 = ∫02 1+𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑛 𝑥 ii. If 𝑎 = 𝑏⃗ or if 𝑎 is parallel to 𝑏⃗ , then 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 = 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑠𝑜 𝑎 ×
ix. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) 𝑡𝑎𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑠𝑒𝑐(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑐
1 𝜋
𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛 𝑥 𝜋
𝜋
𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 𝑏⃗ = 0
1
v. ∫02 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 4 = ∫02 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛 𝑥+𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑛𝑥 iii. Vector product of two parallel or collinear vectors is zero.
x. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) 𝑐𝑜𝑡(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑎 𝑐o𝑠𝑒𝑐 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝜋 𝑛
𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥
𝜋 𝑛
a𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 𝜋
vi. ∫02 𝑛 𝑛 𝑑𝑥 = ∫02 𝑎𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑛 𝑥 + 𝑎𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = iv. If 𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ = 0, 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑎 = 0 𝑜𝑟 𝑏⃗ = 0 𝑜𝑟 a and b are parallel
𝑐 𝑎 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 +𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 4
1
𝜋 𝜋
𝜋 or collinear
xi. ∫ 𝑡𝑎𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) 𝑑𝑥 = − 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)| + 𝑐 vii. ∫0 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = − 2 𝑙𝑜𝑔 2
2 2
Area of a triangle and parallelogram
1 𝜋 𝜋
1
xii. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑡(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)| + 𝑐 viii. ∫02 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = ∫02 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 0 v. The vector of a ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 is equal to 2 |𝐴𝐵 ⃗ × 𝐴𝐶 | or
1 𝜋 𝜋 1
xiii. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑠𝑒𝑐(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) + 𝑡𝑎𝑛(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)| + 𝜋 ⃗𝐶×𝐵
|𝐵 ⃗ 𝐴| 𝑜𝑟 1 |𝐶 𝐵
⃗ × 𝐶 𝐴|.
ix. ∫0 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = ∫0 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 2 𝑙𝑜𝑔 2
2 2
2 2
𝑐 ∞ 𝑏 ∞ 𝑎 vi. The area of a ∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 with vertices having 𝑃𝑉 ′ 𝑠 𝑎, 𝑏⃗, 𝑐
1 x. ∫0 𝑒 −𝑎𝑥 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑏𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = (b)∫0 𝑒 −𝑎𝑥 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝑏𝑥 𝑑𝑥 =
xiv. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 (𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏) − ∞ 𝑛!
𝑎 2+𝑏 2 𝑎 2+𝑏 2 1
respectively , is 2 |𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ + 𝑏⃗ × 𝑐 + 𝑐 × 𝑎|
𝑐𝑜𝑡(𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏)| + 𝑐 xi. ∫0 𝑒 −𝑎𝑥 𝑥 𝑛 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑛 +1
vii. The points whose 𝑃𝑉 ′ 𝑠 are a, b, c are collinear , if and only
xv. ∫ 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙o𝑔|𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 | + 𝑐
if 𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ + 𝑏⃗ × 𝑐 + 𝑐 × 𝑎 = 0
xvi. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = −𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥| + 𝑐
𝜋 𝑥 Vector Algebra viii. Area of parallelogram with adjacent sides a and b is
xvii. ∫ 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔 |𝑡𝑎𝑛 ( 4 + 2)| + 𝑐
|𝑎 × 𝑏⃗|.
𝑥 1
xviii. ∫ 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔 |𝑡𝑎𝑛 2| + 𝑐 A vector has direction and magnitude both but scalar has ix. Area of a parallelogram with diagonal a and b is 2 |𝑎 × 𝑏⃗ |.
Special Integration only magnitude. x.
1
The area of a quadrilateral 𝐴𝐵𝐶𝐷 is equal to |𝐴𝐶 × 𝐵 ⃗𝐷
⃗ |.
1 1 𝑥 1 1 𝑎+𝑥
(i) ∫ 𝑥 2+𝑎2 𝑑𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 𝑎 + 𝑐 (ii)∫ 𝑎2−𝑥 2 𝑑𝑥 = 2𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔 |𝑎−𝑥 | + 𝑐 Magnitude of a vector a is denoted by |𝑎| or a it is non- 2
Moment of a force about a point
𝑑𝑥 1 𝑥−𝑎 𝑑𝑥 𝑥 negative scalar
(iii)∫ 𝑥 2−𝑎 2 𝑑𝑥 = 2𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔 |𝑥+𝑎| + 𝑐 (iv)∫ √(a2 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛−1 𝑎 +𝑐 𝑀⃗⃗ = 𝑟 × 𝐹
−x 2) Properties of vector addition
𝑑𝑥 Scalar triple Product
(v)∫ √𝑥 2 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑥 + √𝑥 2 + 𝑎2 | + 𝑐 i. a⃗ + b ⃗ =b ⃗ + a⃗ (commutative )
+𝑎 2 If a, b, c are three vectors, then (𝑎 × 𝑏⃗). 𝑐 is called scalar triple
(vi)∫ √𝑥 2+ 1
𝑎2 𝑑𝑥 = 2 [𝑥√𝑥 2 + 𝑎2 +𝑎2 log|𝑥 + ii. 𝑎 + (𝑏⃗ + 𝑐 ) = (𝑎 + 𝑏⃗ ) + c (associative ) product and is denoted by
√𝑥 2 + 𝑎2 |] + c
iii. 𝑎 + 0 = a⃗ (𝑎𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 ) a1 b1 c1
1 𝑥 iv. a⃗ + (−a⃗) = 0 (𝑎𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑖𝑛𝑣𝑒r𝑠𝑒 ) [ a b c ]= (𝑎 × 𝑏⃗). 𝑐 , [a b c ] = |a2 b2 c2 |
(vii)∫ √𝑎2 − 𝑥 2 𝑑𝑥 = 2 [ 𝑥 √𝑎2 − 𝑥 2 + 𝑎2 𝑠𝑖𝑛−1 𝑎] + c (𝑘1 + 𝑘2 )a⃗ = 𝑘1 a⃗ + 𝑘2 a⃗ (multiplication by scalar
v. a3 b3 c3
1
(viii)∫ √𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 𝑑𝑥 = 2 [ 𝑥√𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 − 𝑎2 𝑙𝑜𝑔|𝑥 + vector) sets
√𝑥 2 − 𝑎2 |] + c vi. 𝑘(𝑎 + 𝑏⃗) = 𝑘𝑎 + 𝑘𝑏 (multiplication by scalar i. 𝐴 ∩ (𝐵 − 𝐶) = (𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) − (𝐴 ∩ 𝐶)
𝑝 ii. (𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)∆(𝐴 ∩ 𝐶)
(ix)∫(𝑝𝑥 + 𝑞)√𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 𝑑𝑥 = 2𝑎 ∫(2𝑎𝑥 + vector)
Some important results
𝑏)√𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐𝑑𝑥 +
𝑞−𝑝𝑏
∫ √𝑎𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐𝑑𝑥 vii. |𝑎 + 𝑏⃗ | ≤ |𝑎| + |𝑏⃗| and |𝑎 − 𝑏⃗ | ≥ |𝑎 | − |𝑏⃗| If A, B and c are finite sets, and U be the finite universal set, then
2𝑎
Important properties I. 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) = 𝑛(𝐴) + 𝑛(𝐵) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)
S Function Substitution viii. |𝜆𝑎 | = |𝜆||𝑎| II. 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵) = 𝑛(𝐴) + 𝑛(𝐵) ⇔ 𝐴 , 𝐵 are disjoint ,non-void
1 (𝑎2 + 𝑥 2 ), 𝑥= ix. 𝜆0⃗ =0 ⃗ sets .
1
√𝑥 2 + 𝑎2 , 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝜃 x. 𝑚(−𝑎 ) = −𝑚𝑎 = −(𝑚𝑎) III. 𝑛(𝐴 − 𝐵) = 𝑛(𝐴) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)
√𝑥 2+𝑎 2
xi. (– 𝑚)(−𝑎 ) = 𝑚𝑎 𝑖. 𝑒 𝑛(𝐴 − 𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) = 𝑛(𝐴)
2 (𝑎2 − 𝑥 2 ), √𝑎2 − 𝑥 2 , 𝑥=
xii. (𝑚 + 𝑛)𝑎 = 𝑚𝑎 + 𝑛𝑎 IV. 𝑛(𝐴∆𝐵)
1 𝑎 sin 𝜃 𝑜𝑟 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
= no. of element which belong to exactly one of A or B
√𝑎 2−𝑥 2
xiii. 𝑚(𝑎 + 𝑏⃗) = 𝑚𝑎 + 𝑚𝑏⃗
3 𝑛
Expression = 𝑛((𝐴 − 𝐵) ∪ (𝐵 − 𝐴))
(𝑥 ± √𝑥 2 ± 𝑎2 ) The component vectors P and Q are
𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒 the =𝑛(𝐴 − 𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐵 − 𝐴) [∵ (𝐴 − 𝐵)𝑎𝑛𝑑 (𝐵 − 𝐴)𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑗𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 ]
𝑂𝑃 = 𝑥1 𝑖̂ + 𝑦1 𝑗̂ + 𝑧1 𝑘̂
bracket = t =𝑛(𝐴) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐵) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)
𝑂𝑄 = 𝑥2 𝑖̂ + 𝑦2 𝑗̂ + 𝑧2 𝑘̂
4 2𝑥 2𝑥 𝑎 2−𝑥 2 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 =𝑛(𝐴) + 𝑛(𝐵) − 2𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)
− 𝑎2−𝑥 2 , 𝑎2 +𝑥 2 , 𝑎2+𝑥 2 𝑃𝑄 = (𝑥2 − 𝑥1 )𝑖̂ + (𝑦2 − 𝑦1 )𝑗̂ + (𝑧2 − 𝑧1 )𝑘̂
V. 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵 ∪ 𝐶)
5 1 𝑥+𝑎
=𝑡 Its magnitude is √(𝑥2 − 𝑥1 )2 + (𝑦2 − 𝑦1 )2 + (𝑧2 − 𝑧1 )2 = |𝑝𝑞⃗⃗⃗⃗ |
1 1 𝑥+𝑏 𝑺𝒆𝒄𝒕𝒊𝒐𝒏 𝒇𝒐𝒓𝒎𝒖𝒍𝒂 ∶ − =𝑛(𝐴) + 𝑛(𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐶) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) − 𝑛(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐶) +
(𝑥 + 𝑎)1−𝑛 (𝑥 + 𝑏)1+𝑛 Internal division - Let P be a point dividing AB internally in the ratio 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶).
6 𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2𝜃 m:n. then , VI. No. of elements in exactly two of the sets A , B ,C
𝑎−𝑥 𝑎+𝑥
√{ } 𝑜𝑟 √{ } ⃗ +𝑛𝑎⃗
𝑚𝑏 =𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) + 𝑛(𝐶 ∩ 𝐴) − 3𝑛(𝐴 ∩ (𝐵 ∩ 𝐶).
𝑎+𝑥 𝑎−𝑥 𝑟= , 𝐴𝑙𝑠𝑜 (𝑚 + 𝑛)𝑂𝑃 = 𝑚𝑂𝐵 + 𝑛𝑂𝐴
𝑚+𝑛 VII. No. of elements in exactly one of the sets A , B , C
External division - Let P be a point dividing AB externally in the 𝑛(𝐴) + 𝑛(𝐵) + 𝑛(𝐶) − 2𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵) − 2𝑛(𝐵 ∩ 𝐶) −
7 𝑥 = 𝛼 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 𝜃 + ⃗ −𝑛𝑎⃗
=
𝑚𝑏
𝑥−𝛼 𝛽 𝑠𝑖𝑛2 𝜃 ratio m:n then , 𝑟 = 2𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐶) + 3𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵 ∩ 𝐶)
√(𝛽−𝑥 ) 𝑜𝑟√(𝑥 − 𝛼)(𝛽 − 𝑥) 𝑚−𝑛
VIII. 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵′ ) = 𝑛((𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)′ ) = 𝑛(𝑈) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∩ 𝐵)
′
⃗
𝑎⃗ +𝑏
8 𝑥 = 𝑎 (1 − 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃) the position vector of the mid point of 𝑎 𝑎n𝑑 𝑏⃗ 𝑖𝑠 𝑛(𝐴′ ∩ 𝐵′ ) = 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵)′ ) = 𝑛(𝑈) − 𝑛(𝐴 ∪ 𝐵).
√2𝑎𝑥 − 𝑥 2 2

Page 11